Notice: Function WP_Interactivity_API::_process_directives was called incorrectly. Interactivity directives failed to process in "" due to a missing "DD" end tag. Please see Debugging in WordPress for more information. (This message was added in version 6.6.0.) in /home/wimarys/Wim_Arys_photography/public_html/wp-includes/functions.php on line 6114
tips and tricks – Page 18 – Wim Arys

Category: tips and tricks

Category for advanced manuals with tips, tricks and a full menu run-through for mirrorless cameras from Sony, Fuji, Canon, Nikon, Samsung, Panasonic, Olympus, Ricoh/Pentax, Sigma.

  • Sony RX10 III manual

    Sony RX10 III manual

    Introduction

    Welcome to my Sony RX10 III advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting

    camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

    It also gains the option to make one of the customizable buttons act as AF-On, to let you initiate AF and fire the shutter independently.

    Naturally the lens has optical image stabilization built-in, rated at 4.5 stops of shake reduction. A focus range limiter switch has been added to the side of the Mark III’s lens, with a choice of ‘All’ or 3m-infinity.
    Since the Sony RX10 III has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those.

    I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

    Are you looking for an advanced manual with tips and tricks on older models? You can find those posts here:

    Sony RX10

    Sony RX10 II

    Sony RX10 IV

    Diving into the Sony RX10 III MENU system

    When you switch on your Sony RX10 III you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 (Quality and Image Size settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 1

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 20M 5472×3648 pixels
    • M: 10M 3888×2592 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2736×1824 pixels

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 4:3:

    • L: 18M 4864×3648 pixels
    • M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels VGA 640×480 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

    • L: 17M 5472×3080 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
    • S: 4.2M 2720×1528 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1

    • L: 13M 3648×3648 pixels
    • M: 6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
    • S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels

    Note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

    If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3, 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Panorama Size:

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2 (more Quality and Image Size settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 2

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has a rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you risk getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 3 (Shooting modes and Autofocus Drive settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 3

    Auto Mode

    Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

    The Sony RX10 III will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

    Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting, Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.

    This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only usable for jpeg shooting.

    Scene Selection

    This is more easily controlled via the right thumb wheel when you’re in SCN mode, but you can also select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here.

    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing.

    Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterward, to name just one example.

    You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

    • Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. They displayed the items that you can register on the menu of the camera. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 (more Shooting Mode and Autofocus Drive settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 4

    Reg Cust Shoot Set

    You can save a number of settings here to a customized  Shoot Set. There are 3 shoot sets available that you can recall at any time. You can import your current settings to one of these three shoot sets. You can also store these on your SD card and move them from camera to camera.

    Reg Cust Shoot Set

    You can save the following settings:

    • Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
    • Aperture
    • Shutter Speed
    • Drive Mode
    • Exposure compensation
    • ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
    • Metering Mode
    • Focus Mode
    • Focus Area
    • AF On
    Reg Cust Shoot Set settings
    You can press Register to save these custom shoot presets to your SD card.
    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 5 (Autofocus settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 5

    Focus area

     features a Fast Hybrid AF system that combines the respective advantages of 315 phasedetection AF points covering approximately 65% of the sensor and contrastdetection AF to ultimately enable the camera to lock focus in as little as 0.03 seconds.  You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
    • Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the camera tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot.

    Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot  by touching the screen.

    Swt. V/H AF Area

    This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

    Off: disable this feature

    AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX10 III  will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

    AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony RX10 III is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    Pre-AF 

    Select if the Sony RX10 III will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 6 (more Autofocus settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 6

    AF Area Regist.

    Another feature inherited from Canon. By registering an AF area/point, you have a quick way to move between points without having the thumb-stick of scroll across the AF field. For example, a bird photographer can set their camera up so they can quickly switch from a spot AF point for precisely focusing on a static subject, to a wide AF pattern for quickly gaining and tracking a bird in flight.

    Del. Reg. AF Area

    Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after it achieves focus.

    Disp. cont. AF Area

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when Focus Area is set to Wide and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    Phase Detect Area:

    Use only the phase detection points.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 (Exposure Settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 7

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    Reset EV Comp

    Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-1600 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 1600. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Iso Auto Min SS.

    This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in  P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.

    You have three possibilities here:

    • FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember, this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the camera is capable of doing so.
    • STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
    • 1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    • Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
    • Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 8 (more Exposure settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 6

    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 (Flash settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 9

    If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10 (Color, White Ballance and Image Processing settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 10

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    • Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
    • Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
    • White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

    This functionality can be changed:

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.

    Gamma:
      • Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
      • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
      • Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
      • Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
        Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
      • Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
      • Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
      • ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
      • ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
      • S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
      • S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
    Color Mode:
      • Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
      • Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
      • ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
      • Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
        S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
      • S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
      • This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
      • S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
        This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
        Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
    Black Level:

    This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to 15.  As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

    Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

    This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma:

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and 7.

    [Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

    Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee:

    This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

    First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.

    • Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual
    • Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%
    • Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low
    • Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%
    • Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to 5
    Mode:
    Auto:
    Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).

    • [Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white-grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
    • [Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
    • When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].
    Manual:
    Sticks to settings based on the following selections.

    • [Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.
    • [Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
      A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to 5, the Knee function is disabled.
    • Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.
    Saturation

    A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.

    Color Phase

    As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

    Color Depth

    This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

    A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
    This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
    Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

    Emphasizing image edges (Detail)

    This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.

    Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

    Level

    This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

    • If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
    • Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
    • Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
    • The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 (more Color, White Ballance, and Image Processing settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12 (Focus Assist settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 12

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif. Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Initial Focus Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking Level
              • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
              • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
            • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13 (more Focus Assist settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 13

    Focus Ring Rotate

    This option lets you choose which direction to rotate the lens ring that is assigned to adjust manual focus, turning either left or right to focus on more distant subjects. You can set this option according to what feels most natural to you.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 14 (Face Detection and Shoot Assist Settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 14

    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to detect automatically and focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – (Camera Settings1) – [Face Registration] – [New Registration].
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony RX10 mark 3 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1 (Movie settings 1)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 1

    MovieExposure Mode

    You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    HFR (High Frame Rate): Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you want.

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    •  Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    •  Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    •  Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File format (for movies)

    Selects the movie file format.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records high-definition movies in XAVC S 4K. This format supports a higher bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • AXAVC S HD: (default setting):Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD with larger amounts of data. Audio: LPCM
    • AVCHD:The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than computers.

    Note that when recording XAVC S format movies, you should use Class 10 or faster SDXC memory cards. At Least 64 GB.

    Record Setting

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. You can change the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality. If you’re not familiar with this, leave as is.

    Menu items details:

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K:

    • 30p 100M/25p 100M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
    • 30p 60M/25p 60M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps
    • 24p 100M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
    • 24p 60M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 24p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps. You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps. You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps

    When  File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i 24M(FX)*: 50i 24M(FX): Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 60i 17M(FH): 50i 17M(FH) (default setting): Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 60p 28M(PS)*:

    General notes:

    • Movies recorded with the [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] as the [Record Setting] are converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. You cannot create a disc in the original image quality. This conversion can take a long time. If you want to keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.
    • [120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.
      • [Intelligent Auto]
      • [Superior Auto]
      • [Scene Selection]
    HFR settings

    By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth super-slow-motion movie.

    1. Set the mode dial to High Frame Rate. The HFR setting screen will be displayed.
    2. Select MENU- Camera Settings-HFR Settings and select the desired settings for Record Setting, Frame Rate, Priority Setting, and REC Timing. You can adjust the desired exposure mode by selecting MENU- camera Settings-High Frame Rate. You can set other shooting settings such as focus area, focus mode, and frame rate, and perform zooming on the HFR setting screen.
    3. Press the in the center of the control wheel. The HFR shooting screen will be displayed. To change the settings, press in the center once again to switch to the HFR setting screen.
    4. Press the MOVIE button. The camera will automatically start recording as soon as you finish shooting
    Menu item details
    • HFR Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie from 60p 50M/50p 50M, 30p 50M/25p 50M, and 24p 50M.
    • HFR Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate from 240fps/250fps, 480fps/500fps, and 960fps/1000fps.
    • FFR Priority Setting: Select Quality Priority or Shoot Time Priority. If you select Shoot Time Priority, the recordable duration is longer than in Quality Priority mode.
    • HFR REC Timing: Selects whether to record a set amount of time after pressing the MOVIE button (Start Trigger), or to record for a set amount of time until you press the MOVIE button (End Trigger).
    Frame rate

    In super-slow-motion movie shooting, the camera shoots at a faster shutter speed than the number of shooting frames per second. For example, when [Frame Rate] is set to [960fps], the shutter speed per frame will be faster than approx. 1/1000 second in order to shoot 960 frames per second. To maintain this shutter speed, sufficient ambient light is necessary during shooting. If the ambient light is insufficient, the ISO sensitivity will become higher, resulting in more noise.

    Shortest shooting distance

    The image becomes out of focus when the subject is too close, such as during macro shooting. Shoot from the shortest shooting distance (from the front of the lens, approximately 3 cm (0.10 ft.) at the wide-angle end, approximately 72 cm (2.36 ft.) at the telephoto end, and approximately 140 cm (4.59 ft.) at a 35 mm-equivalent focal length of around 250 mm) or further.

    Timing of recording

    Depending on the [REC Timing] setting, the relationship between when you press the MOVIE button and the recorded section of the movie is as shown below.[Start Trigger]
    Movie capturing (shooting) starts when the MOVIE button is pressed. When the MOVIE button is pressed again, or when the recordable duration of time has elapsed, movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to the memory card.

    (A): The point when the MOVIE button is pressed
    (B): Recorded section
    (C): Recording to memory card in progress (You cannot start the next session of shooting.)[End Trigger]/[End Trigger Half]
    Buffering (temporarily capturing a movie on the camera) starts once the shooting standby screen is displayed. When the captured data fills the buffering capacity, old data is overwritten sequentially. When you press the MOVIE button, the camera starts to record a movie of the set duration calculated retroactively from that point on the memory card.

    • With [End Trigger], a movie of the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], a movie of half the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], the time it takes to record to the memory card is also shorter than with [End Trigger].

    End Trigger

    End Trigger Half

    (A): The point when the MOVIE button is pressed
    (B): Recorded section
    (C): Recording to memory card in progress (You cannot start the next session of shooting.)
    (D): Buffering in progress

    To redo shooting

    You can cancel recording by selecting [Cancel] on the screen. However, the movie recorded up to the point you cancelled will be saved.

    Playback speed

    The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [Frame Rate] and [Record Setting].

    Frame Rate Record Setting
    24p 50M* 30p 50M/25p 50M 60p 50M/50p 50M
    240fps/250fps 10 times slower 8 times slower/10 times slower 4 times slower/5 times slower
    480fps/500fps 20 times slower 16 times slower/20 times slower 8 times slower/10 times slower
    960fps/1000fps 40 times slower 32 times slower/40 times slower 16 times slower/20 times slower

    *Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

    [Priority Setting] and shooting duration
    Priority Setting Frame Rate Effective pixel number read out from image sensor Shooting duration
    Quality Priority 240fps/250fps 1824×1026 Approx. 4 seconds
    480fps/500fps 1824×616 Approx. 3 seconds
    960fps/1000fps 1244×420
    Shoot Time Priority 240fps/250fps 1824×616 Approx. 7 seconds
    480fps/500fps 1292×436 Approx. 7 seconds/Approx. 6 seconds
    960fps/1000fps 912×308 Approx. 6 seconds
    Playback time

    For example, if you shoot for approx. 4 seconds with [Record Setting] set to [24p 50M]*, [Frame Rate]set to [960fps], and [Priority Setting] set to [Shoot Time Priority], the playback speed will be 40 times slower and the playback time will be approx. 160 seconds (approx. 2 minutes and 40 seconds).

    Quality Dual Rec

    Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies. (Extra Fine, Fine or Standard)

    Krueger lion

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 2 (Movie settings 2)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 2

    Img. Size (Dual Rec)

    Selects the size of still images to be shot while recording movies.

    • L: 17M
    • M: 7.5M
    • S: 4.2M
    Auto Dual Rec

    Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when impressive compositions, including people, are detected. This function may also record versions of the automatically shot images that have been trimmed into optimal compositions. When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the trimmed image will be recorded.

    • Off: Auto Dual Rec is not performed.
    • On: Shoot. Frequency Low/On: Shoot. Frequency Standard/On: Shoot. Frequency High: Auto Dual Rec is performed with the specified shooting frequency.
    Proxy Setting

    Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording XAVC S movies. Since proxy movies are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites. Note that you cannot playback Proxy movies on the camera screen.

    • Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as that of the original movie.
    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 3 (Movie settings 3)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 3

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
    • During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.
    Audio Out Timing

    You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

    • Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
    • Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Steadyshot (Movie)

    Sets SteadyShot effect when shooting movies.

    • Intelligent Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than Active.
    • Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
    • Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
    • Off: Does not use SteadyShot.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 4 (Movie settings 4)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 4

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Video Light Mode

    Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

    • Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
    • REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
    • REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
    • Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.
    Movie w/ shutter

    You can map the movie recording function to the shutter button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 5 (Shutter and Steadyshot settings)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 5

    Shutter Type (still image)

    You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

    • AutoThe shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.
    • Mechanical Shut.Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
    • Electronic Shut.Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 6 (Zoom lens settings)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 6

    Rng. of Zoom Assist

    Selects how much to zoom out with the Zoom Assist function. Small, Medium or Large amounts are available.

    Zoom Setting
    • Optical zoom only: Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set Image Size to M, S or VGA.
    • On:ClearImage Zoom: Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate significantly.
    • On:Digital Zoom: When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.
    Zoom Speed

    Sets the zoom speed of the camera’s zoom lever.o either normal or fast.

    Zoom Ring Rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the rotational directions of the lens ring to which the zoom function has been assigned. For either righthanded or lefthanded people.

    Zoom Func. on Ring

    Sets the zoom functions when using the lens ring to change zoom scales.

    • Standard: Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the lens ring.
    • Quick: Zooms in/out to an angle of view corresponding to how far the lens ring has been rotated.
    • Step: Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the lens ring.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 7 (Display screen and Auto Review settings)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Zebra 

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line (stills)

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 8 (more screen and Auto Review Settings)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 8

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 9 (Customizable bottons and dial settings)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 9

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the center of the multi-selector while shooting.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3
    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Lens Ring setup

    You can zoom and focus more intuitively using the two lens rings (front and rear). Assigns the focus function or the zoom function to the front lens ring and rear lens ring.

    Movie Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button. Either always or only when you’re in Movie mode.

    Dial Lock

    You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 10 (other custom settings)

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 10

    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    Write Date (stills)

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 1

    RX10 IV Network settings 1

    Send To Smartphone
      • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
      • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
      • You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6300 screen.
      • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
      • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    Ctrl w/ smartphone

    By connecting the camera to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

    Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings

    So the camera apps from the Playmemories store can’t be used on the RX10 Mark 3. You can however remotely control your camera with the Playmemories app for iPhone or Android.

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-7rm3.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your camera shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 1

    RX10 IV Network settings

    Bluetooth Settings.

    Another new feature only previously available in the A6500 and A9  is Bluetooth connectivity. It is possible to connect your camerato your smartphone in order to Geotag your images.

    Bluetooth Settings controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected to your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the camera, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    1. Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
    2. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
    3. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
    4. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    5. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    6. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. The pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    7. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].

    (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which RX10 3 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    MENU - playback options - page 1

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Disp Cont Shoot Grp

    Sets whether to display continuously shot images as a group. (you’ll see an image stack on your screen)

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    MENU - playback options - page 2

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Init. Mag

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images. Either standard or with the magnification used on the previous image.

    Enlarge Initial Pos

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. Choose either the point of focus or the screen center. I go for the point of focus.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

     Motion Interval ADJ

    Strange place in the Menu for this option, but you can adjust the interval of the subject’s motion here.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    MENU - Setup - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

     Tile Menu

    Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU button.

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    MENU - Setup - page 2

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

    Pwr Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touchpad operations.”

    • Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    MENU - Setup - page 3

    Touch Pad Settings

    You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

    • Operation in V Orien.: Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
    • Touch Pos. Mode: Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen , or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement .
    • Operation Area: Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
    Demo Mode

    For display purposes in stores.

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post-production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs video in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.

    HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

    HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

    HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

    MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    MENU - Setup - page 4

    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your RX10 III for the first time.

    Area Settings

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    MENU - Setup - page 5

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Set File Name

    Use the standard file naming system or a customisable one.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    MENU - Setup - page 6

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    MENU – My Menu setting

    My menu setting

    This is a new functionality. It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.

    Add Item

    You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.

    Sort Item

    This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

    Delete Item

    Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

    Delete Page

    Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

    Delete All

    Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

    Troubleshooting

    If you experience error messages with the Sony RX10 III, try the following solutions.

      1. If a message such as “C/E:□□:□□” appears on the screen, refer to the self-diagnosis display.
      1. Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.
    1. Initialize the settings

    More setup tips and settings for specific scenarios

    Birds in Flight/ fast action

    A high high shutter speed for eliminating/reducing motion blur and minimising effect of camera shake. High burst rate for more chances at success and better tracking.

    Mode

    Use Aperture priority and selected F4, this to retain the highest possible shutter speed. If needed, you can always very quickly override the F4 setting by turning the control wheel on the lens.

    Mind that you can very easily accidentally turn the aperture control wheel on the lens and end up with an aperture you were not expecting.

    Drive mode

    High speed burst mode (24FPS) is essential to allow you to better track rapidly moving birds.

    ISO

    Set auto ISO to aminimum 100 and maximum 400. If push comes to shove I can quickly override this as I have programmed the right hand position on the control wheel to change ISO.

    There is an option to select the “Auto ISO minimum shutter speed”: Select “Faster” as you want to keep the shutter speed up for BIF.

    Focus area

    Use “Wide” as I think it is practically impossible to keep a flying bird sufficiently close to the centre of the frame to ensure that the camera focuses on the bird and not something else. I have also found the camera’s ability to discern and follow the bird in this mode to be very, very good.

    Metering

    Use Large Spot. With Large Spot hopefully I frequently have the subject in the spot to get good exposure. If not I am no worse off than with Multi.

    Note that I find that metering with BIF requires manual intervention” in the form of EC quite often. The background (sky) is frequently significantly brighter than the subject so it is prudent to dial in some positive EC. Set this into Custom Memory 1 and this is the setup I normally use when I walk around.

    Static Subjects

    Tracking and rapid burst mode is not essential and it is important to have as small as possible focus area to avoid the effect of branches/twigs etc that get in the way.

    Mode

    Aperture priority and F4. Same comments as before.

    Drive mode

    Medium speed burst mode (10FPS). I consider using burst mode together with AF-C to be very important for ensuring you get good results. Reasons? Birds move: burst mode and AF-C minimises the potential blurry shots. Also: sometimes the camera misses the focus on the first shot. If it is your only shot you have a blurry image. If you use burst mode with AF-S you have several blurry images.

     ISO

    Auto ISO with minimum 100 and maximum 400 with “Auto ISO minimum shutter speed”= Faster

    Focus area

    As mentioned I want the smallest possible focus area to ensure I focus on the bird and nothing else. Ergo: I use the smallest possible flexible spot in the middle of the frame. And I have never felt the need to move it.

    Metering

    I use Standard Spot as I am only interested in the exposure of the subject.

    I have programmed this into Custom Memory 2. I have also programmed this into Custom Hold 2 and assigned Custom Hold 2 to the “Focus hold” button on the lens. The reason for this is that I use the BIF setting for walking around and sometimes want to quickly go to the perched bird setting. Seeing as this happens quite often I wanted the easiest to use button to hold: Focus hold is it!

    Other buttons

    I use one other custom setting that I have programmed to Custom Memory 3: this is for general/landscape use. I have set up a similar configuration as Custom Hold 3 with the AEL button to access this. This is the second most common “hold” I will use so I programmed it to the second most comfortable button to press while using the shutter release.

    Because I quite often want to jump between custom configurations I have programmed Memory Recall into the first Fn button location. To switch between configurations I press the Fn button, press enter (to select memory recall), scroll left or right to memory 1, 2 or 3 and press enter.

    On the rear control wheel I have:

    – Left: AF area

    – Down: Burst mode

    – Right: ISO

    Conclusion

    The Sony RX10 III brought many new software innovations to the RX line. Besides the ability to record in 4K and make High Frame rate movies, you shouldn’t overlook the many new focusing aides inside the Sony RX10 III like Eye AF and focus peaking. I hope you found my advanced manual for the RX10 III with tips and tricks useful. If you have any questions, I’d love to hear from you in the comment section below.

  • Sony RX10 manual

    Sony RX10 manual

    Introduction

    The Sony DSC-RX10 is a nice bridge camera Although this is a relatively easy camera to use, it is still very customizable, and this might seem daunting at first. No worries, I’ve assembled a guide to the most important functions of the Sony DSC-RX10, including some tips and tricks. First things fist: setting up your camera for your use and getting to know the MENU system.

    But first, are you looking for another RX10 camera manual? You can find those here:

    Sony RX10 II

    Sony RX10 III

    Sony RX10 IV

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time, and time zone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your beloved pictures.
    After this is set up, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (this menu is called camera settings).

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 1)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Image Size (Dual Rec)
    You can set the size of still images shot while recording a movie. Very cool feature.
    When Record Setting is set to anything other than VGA, L (or Large) will save 17 Mb images, S (or small) will keep 4,2 Mb pictures.
    When Record Setting is set to VGA, Large will keep 13mb pictures, small will render 3,2 Mb pictures.
    In either case, If you want to print images up to A3 format, select large.
    Quality (Dual Rec)

    Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies. Extra Fine, Fine or Standard are selectable. With the low prices of SD cards on the market, and the relatively small size of Jpeg images, it is best to go for the highest quality Extra Fine setting.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 2)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    File Format (video)

    XAVC S records high-definition movies such as 4K by converting them to MP4 movies using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec. MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 can compress images at higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images while reducing the amount of data.

    The following Movie formats are available with the RX10:

    • XAVC S 4K: Records high-definition movies in XAVC S 4K. This format supports a higher bit rate. It records audio in the LPCM format. Bit-rate is approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
    • XAVC S HD: Records high-definition movies in XAVC S HD. This format supports a higher bit rate. It records audio in the LPCM format. Bit-rate is approx. 100 Mbps, Approx. 60 Mbps, or Approx. 50 Mbps Records a more vivid movie compared to AVCHD with increased amounts of information.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. It records audio in the Dolby Digital format. Bit-rate is approx. 28 Mbps (Maximum), Approx. 24 Mbps (Maximum) or Approx. 17 Mbps (Average) The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than computers.

    Notes:

    • In order to record movies with File Format set to XAVC S 4K, an SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (SD Speed Class 10) is needed.
    • Display] is temporarily set Off when File Format is set to XAVC S 4K . Images will not appear on the monitor when you record movies while the camera is connected to an HDMI device when set to XAVC S 4K.
    • Smile/Face Detect and Center Lock-on AF are temporarily set to Off when the camera is connected to an HDMI device when set to XAVC S 4K.
    • Even if the camera is connected to an HDMI device, images will not be displayed on that device while movie recording is in progress.
    • When File Forma is set to AVCHD, the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • When  File Format is set to MP4, the file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.
    Record Setting

    This setting selects the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality.

    File Format is set to XAVC S 4K or HD

    The camera records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.

    File Format is set to AVCHD
    • 60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    When File Format is set to MP4

    Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i compatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, MP4 format.

    Record Setting Menu options
    File Format is set to XAVC S 4K
    • 30p 100M/25p 100M: Records movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps.
    • 30p 60M/25p 60M: Records movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps.
    • 24p 100M: Records movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps.
    • 24p 60M*: Records movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps.
    File Format is set to XAVC S HD
    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps.
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps.
    • 24p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps.
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps.
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps.
    File Format is set to AVCHD
    • 60i 24M(FX) and 50i 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Max Bit-rate: 24 Mbps.
    • 60i 17M(FH) and  50i 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Averages Approx. 17 Mbps.
    • 60p 28M(PS) and 50p 28M(PS): Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Max Bit-rate: 28 Mbps.
    • 24p 24M(FX) and 25p 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). Max Bit-rate24 Mbps.
    • 24p 17M(FH) and 25p 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p).

    Tip: use 24 or 25p for a cinema-like atmosphere.

    File Format is set to MP4
    • 1920×1080 60p 28M/1920×1080 50p 28M: Records the movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. average 28 Mbps.
    • 1920×1080 30p 16M/1920×1080 25p 16M: Records the movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. average 16 Mbps.
    • 1280×720 30p 6M/1280×720 25p 6M: Records small file size movies in 1280×720 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. average 6 Mbps.

    Note: 120p and 100p cannot be selected when in Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto or Scene Selection.

    Dual Video Rec

    Dual Video Rec allows you to Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie. Settings are either ON or OFF.

    You can also capture still images while recording movies without stopping. Simply start recording with the Movie button and press the shutter to take still images. The message Capture will appear on the screen. You can select the image size and quality of the stills in the Quality Dual Rec Menu.

    HFR settings

    You can select 4 different exposure mode for High Frame Rate (HFR) shooting based on the subject and effect you want. Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority or  Manual Exposure are available.

    Panorama Size

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama Direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either up, down, left or right).

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 3)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Drive Mode

    Drive Mode depicts the what action the camera will take when pressing the shutter.  Keep in mind that when you’re Scene Selection or Sports Action mode, Single Shooting can not be engaged.

    These are the available modes:

    Single Shooting

    Shoots a single still image when pressing the shutter button.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Cont. Shooting

    Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Continuous Shooting Mode is available when you’re in Speed Panorama, Scene Selection, Auto HDR and Smile shutter.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Spd Priority Cont.

    Shoots images continuously at high speed while you press and hold down the shutter button. In Speed Priority Continuous, the focus is fixed when you half-press the shutter button. However, the exposure value is adjusted for each image. By getting AEL w/ shutter in the Menu OFF, this exposure adjustment per frame is disabled.

    Self-timer

    Self Timer shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed. Can be set to either 2, 5 or 10 seconds.

    Self-timer(Cont)

    Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Self time Cont. Takes a series of images with a timer function.

    You have a choice between:

    • 10-second timer and three consecutive images.
    • 10-second timer with five consecutive images.
    • 5-second timer with three consecutive images.
    • 5-second timer with five consecutive images.
    • 2-second timer with three consecutive images.
    • 2-second timer with five consecutive images.
    Cont. Bracket
    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Cont. Bracket: the camera takes a series of images with different exposures continuously.

    Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. The last shot in the series is the one shown on the screen. When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if Cont. Bracket is selected. Bracket shooting is unavailable in Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Scene Selection, or Sweep Panorama. When ISO AUTO is chosen in Manual Exposure mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than ISO AUTO is selected, the exposure is changed by changing the shutter speed.

    You can choose between:

    • 3 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3 EV
    • 5 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3 EV
    • 9 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3 EV
    • 3 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.7 EV
    • 5 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.7 EV
    • 9 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.7 EV
    • 3 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 1.0 EV
    • 5 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 1.0 EV
    • 9 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 1.0 EV
    • 3 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 2.0 EV
    • 5 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 2.0 EV
    • 3 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 3.0 EV
    • 5 consecutive images with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 3.0 EV
    Single Bracket
    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Cont. Bracket: the camera takes a series of images with different exposures once.

    Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different brightness.

    Same choices as Cont. Bracket. The difference is that the sequence will fire only once here.

    WB bracket

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature and color filter.

    • White Balance Bracket: Lo records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance.
    • White Balance Bracket: Hi records a series of three images with significant changes in the white balance.
    DRO Bracket

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

    • DRO Bracket: Lo records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value.
    • DRO Bracket: Hi records a series of three images with significant changes in the D-Range Optimizer value.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing in these settings.

    • Self Timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also establishes the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer.
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Flash Mode

    Different flash techniques can create some unique and interesting images. The default setting depends on the shooting mode, and some shooting modes don’t have all flash modes available. Another limitation is that the Wireless option cannot be used with the internal flash.

    These are the Flash modes available on the RX10:

    • Flash Off: The flash does not operate.
    • Autoflash: The Flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
    • Fill-flash: The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
    • Slow Sync.: The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
    • Rear Sync.: The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
    • Wireless: When using a wireless flash, the shading effect provides a more 3D appearance to a subject than when using an attached flash. This mode is effective when you attach a remote control-compatible external flash  to the camera, and shoot with a wireless flash (sold separately), placed away from the camera.
    • Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
      Slow Sync. uses a slower sync speed for a good exposure of both subject and background.
    Flash Compensation

    Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. If you use Exposure compensation, this will changes both the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture. Flash Compensation does not work when the shooting mode is set to Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, [Sweep Panorama or Scene Selection.

    Red Eye Reduction

    Set either ON or OFF. When enabled, the flash will pre-fire once or twice to reduce the commonly know red-eye problem in photos.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 4)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Focus Area

    The settings here apply to both Still Image Shooting and Movies. The different Focus Modes are one of the most significant tweaks one can do. The factory settings of a camera always intend to cover a broad range of shooting styles, but you’ll often find that a few tweaks here and there can iprove performance greatly for your particular style of shooting.

    The following modes are available:

    • Wide: Focuses automatically on a subject in all ranges of the image. Wide uses all available on-sensor Phase and contrast detect points. It’s useful for a broad variety of shooting styles, but might not always focus on exactly what you want. When you press the shutter button halfway down in still image shooting mode, a green square is displayed around the area that is in focus.
    • Center: Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the picture. It’s the most fundamental Focus area mode, and on a recent Sony Camera, it’s better to use the more advanced Expand Flexible spot.
    • Flexible Spot: Allows you to move the AF range frame to the desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area.
    • Expand Flexible Spot: If the product fails to focus on the single selected point, it uses the focus points around the flexible spot as the second priority area to achieve focus.
    • Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to Lock-on AF on the Focus Area setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area to be the flexible spot or expand flexible spot. Only selectable when in Continuous AF mode.
    AF Illuminator

    Only used in Still Shooting. The AF illuminator supplies a red beam of light to focus more easily on a subject in low light situations. The red AF illuminator allows the product to focus quickly when the shutter button is pressed halfway, until the focus is locked. Set to Auto (On) or Off.

    You cannot use AF illuminator in movie mode, in Sweep Panorama, when Focus Mode is set to Cont. AF, or when Scene Selection is in Landscape, Sport, or Night Scene.

    Exposure Comp

    You can adjust the exposure in a range of –3.0EV to 3.0EV when the exposure compensation dial is set to zero. Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make the entire image brighter or darker (i.e. for Low Key Photography) if you adjust Exposure Compensation.

    For Movies, you can adjust the exposure in a range of –2.0 EV to 2.0 EV.

    When the exposure compensation dial is set to other than “0,” settings for the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized. For example, if you set Exposure Comp. to 3.0EV, but the exposure compensation dial is configured to 2.0EV, the “ 2.0EV” setting will be prioritized.

    When you use Manual Exposure, you can compensate for the exposure only when ISO is set to ISO AUTO.

    ISO Auto

    Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number. The larger the number, the higher the sensitivity. You can change the automatically set ISO sensitivity range for the ISO AUTO mode. Select ISO AUTO and press the right side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for ISO AUTO Maximum and ISO AUTO Minimum.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    ISO settings are also available through the Fn button and Menu. A Quick way of changing many of the most used camera settings.
    ISO Auto Min. SS

    This is another important setting if you want to get the most out of your camera. If you select ISO AUTO when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. This function is very practical for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera shake.

    Available settings:

    1. FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard setting so that you can prevent camera shake and subject blurring.
    2. STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    3. SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting, so you can shoot images with less noise.
    4. 1/32000―30″: The ISO sensitivity begins to change at the shutter speed you have set.

    The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between Faster, Fast, Standard, Slow, and Slower is 1 EV. Remember that when using a flash, this setting might not function as set.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 5)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    ND Filter

    The Sony RX10 has a built-in ND filter that reduces lit hitting the sensor by about three stops. You can slow down the shutter speed and decrease the aperture value for a better exposure. Also ideal for shooting at large apertures in bright daylight (for a better subject-background separation) or for special effects like cloud streaks, milky waterfalls, and misty seascapes.

    Settings available are:

    • Auto: Automatically turns on the ND filter based on the shooting mode and brightness.
    • On: Always uses the electronic ND Filter.
    • Off: Disables the ND Filter.
    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Multi metering mode

    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Center Metering Mode
    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Spot Metering Mode
    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customise the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Daylight White Ballance
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyzes the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) This feature shoots 3 images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the under exposed image and the dark area of the over exposed image to create an image with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (as it some other camera manufacturers implement this). There are a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real bost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 6)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Picture Profile

    Picture Profile is a menu for adjusting and changing parameters that determine an image’s characteristics. There are many parameters that can be adjusted, but they can be grouped into four types:

    Parameters for selecting basic contrast and color tone.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.

    Gamma

    Movie Standard gamma curve for video
    Still Standard gamma curve for still images
    Cine1 Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33)
    Cine2 Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
    ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5)
    ITU709 (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2]
    S-Log2 Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording.

    Color Mode

    Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve
    Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve
    Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] gamma curve
    Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
    ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in conjunction with [ITU709] gamma curve)
    Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
    S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].

    • S-Gamut is a color space unique to Sony that provides a wide color space equivalent to film cameras. However, the S-Gamut setting on this camera does not support the whole color space of S-Gamut; it is intended to achieve color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
    Parameters for adjusting gradation (darkness-brightness tone)

    Black Level

    This function adjusts the black level of the image.

    Parameters Settings
    Black Level –15 to 15

    As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression. Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black.
    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas.

    Parameters Settings
    Black Gamma > Range Wide / Middle / Narrow
    Black Gamma > Level –7 to 7

    [Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the field close to black while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you wish to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

    Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and reduce the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee

    This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

    First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.

    Parameters Settings
    Knee > Mode Auto / Manual
    Knee > Auto Set > Max Point 90% to 100%
    Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity High / Mid / Low
    Knee > Manual Set > Point 75% to 105%
    Knee > Manual Set > Slope –5 to 5

    Mode

    Auto:
    Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following configuration (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).

    • [Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
    • [Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
    • When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].
    Manual:
    Sticks to settings based on the following selections.

    • [Point] establishes the position of the knee point output level.
    • [Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
      A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range but bolsters the capacity to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to 5, the Knee function is disabled.
    • Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.
    Parameters for adjusting coloring

    Saturation

    This function adjusts the color saturation.

    Parameters Settings
    Saturation –32 (fainter in color) to 32 (richer in color)

    A positive value results in more vivid colors while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings, create artistic finishes.

    Color Phase

    This function adjusts the color hue.

    Parameters Settings
    Color Phase –7 (Greenish) to 7 (Reddish)

    As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

    Color Depth

    This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

    Parameters Settings
    Color Depth > R –7 to 7
    Color Depth > G –7 to 7
    Color Depth > B –7 to 7
    Color Depth > C –7 to 7
    Color Depth > M –7 to 7
    Color Depth > Y –7 to 7

    A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
    This setting doesn’t only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
    Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

    Parameters for highlighting image edges

    This feature changes how much detail is applied to the subject’s image sides.

    Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

    Parameters Settings
    Detail > Level –7 (Weak) to 7 (Strong)
    Detail > Adjust > Mode Auto / Manual
    Detail > Adjust > V/H Balance –2 (Stronger Vertical (V) detail) to 2 (Stronger Horizontal (H) detail)
    Detail > Adjust > B/W Balance Type1 (Higher proportion of black detail) to Type5 (Higher proportion of white detail)
    Detail > Adjust > Limit 0 (Strongly restricted) to 7 (No restriction)
    Detail > Adjust > Crispening 0 (No restriction) to 7 (Strongly restricted)
    Detail > Adjust > Hi-Light Detail 0 (Smaller detail amount) to 4 (Larger detail amount)

    Level

    This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

    • If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
    • Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
    • Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
    • The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to display the image on large TVs or screens.

    Mode

    If you want to make finer adjustments to detail, set [Mode] in [Adjust] to [Manual] and adjust the following settings.

    V/H Balance

    This function regulates the balance between Vertical (V) detail and Horizontal (H) detail. Vertical (V) feature boosts image edges by expanding them upward and downward. Horizontal (H) feature emphasizes image outlines by thickening them to the left and right.

    • The results of detail processing may appear differently depending on the TV, computer display or another type of display monitor. Adjust [V/H Balance] as needed.
    • To emphasize the impression of a subject that has many horizontal elements, such as a human face (with eyes and mouth), you can increase the proportion of Vertical (V) detail by lowering the setting (selecting a lower set value).

    B/W Balance

    This function changes the balance between the amount of black detail for low-luminance areas and the amount of white detail for high-luminance areas.

    Limit

    This feature restricts the amount of black detail for low-luminance areas and white detail for high-luminance areas by setting a maximum value. The maximum value cannot be set independently for black detail and white detail.

    • [B/W Balance] and [Limit] adjust the amount of black detail and white detail added to image edges.
    • Black detail adds the impressions of “power,” “hardness,” and “presence” to the subject. But it may bring undesirable effects because it emphasizes wrinkles and pores.
    • The white detail gives the subject a “clean” and “glossy” impression. You can increase the proportion of white detail and reduce that of black detail when shooting jewelry and glass objects to heighten their clarity and translucence.

    Crispening

    This function reduces detail that accompanies visual noise to prevent noise from being emphasized.
    You can use this function when you want to apply detail processing to the subject while keeping noise as unnoticeable as possible.

    Hi-Light Detail

    This function adjusts the detail level for bright subjects.
    You can use this to emphasize the edges of a bright subject in front of a high-luminance background.

    Picture Profile presets

    Supporting a broad range of adjustable settings, this camera’s Picture Profile menu allows you to change a variety of settings, such as Gamma Curve, Color, and Detail. Up to 7 sets of setting combinations can be stored in the internal memory as PP1 through PP7.

    Using Picture Profile presets

    The RX10 is equipped with several Picture Profile presets as a default setting. By using these presets, you can match the image texture with other types of cameras equipped with the [Picture Profile] function, or create a picture texture that is similar to that of cinematic film.

    Difference from image processing using nonlinear video editing software

    Picture Profile adjusts colors and the vividness of the picture during recording. You can make similar adjustments by using nonlinear editing software after shooting. But there are the following differences.

    To fit massive amounts of image data in a limited memory capacity, this camera compresses image data when recording. No matter how advanced a compression format is, any data compression inevitably deteriorates image quality somewhat. Applying sharpness, gamma curve correction and other video effects to recorded images by using nonlinear editing software worsens the image condition further by processing already deteriorated images. For example, if video compression leaves the image with reduced contrast or block noise in some areas, applying video effects often make the problems more noticeable.
    Because Picture Profile processes video signals before compressing, it changes the gamma curve and corrects colors before image quality is damaged by compression. This makes it possible to carry out highly precise image adjustments while keeping the quality of the subject intact. It should also be noted that recording images with proper contrast is crucial. If image contrast in dark and bright areas is not recorded correctly, this will result in underexposed dark and overexposed white areas with no gradations. This means you cannot change image contrast properly later on with nonlinear editing software no matter how hard you try because there will be no gradations to work with.

    If you intend to process your video with nonlinear editing software later, it is important that you record your image in the right way.

    Nonlinear editing software is a very powerful tool, but can’t fix everything. If you adjust various settings to make sure your video is recorded in a way that matches your ideal as much as possible, you will be able to create a video that will be closer to what you have in mind with minimal processing via nonlinear editing software. It will also keep rendering time short and make video editing work more efficient.

    What to do with Picture Profile

    If you are working on a project with ample time for editing or a short piece, record an image that is as flat as possible to allow for many different kinds of post-production image processing and color adjustments.

    If you are working on a project with a tight deadline or a long piece, on the other hand, you can dramatically reduce the amount of post-production image processing and enable highly efficient production by recording the video as close to the vision of the finished image as possible. Showing the image being recorded to the director and crew as close to the tone of the ideal finished image as possible on a display monitor will significantly boost morale on the scene, which has a significant impact on the quality of the finished work. In order to avoid the problems with nonlinear editing described in the previous section, and also to create pieces with mobility that make the most of this camera’s unique characteristics, try to fully utilize Picture Profile while recording images at the proper settings.

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would chance it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and camera is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks
    Object tracking
    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to automatically detect on focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 7)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Auto Dual Rec

    Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when impressive compositions, including people, are detected. This function may also record versions of the automatically shot images that have been trimmed into optimal arrangements. When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the cut image will be recorded.

    1. Off: Auto Dual Rec is not performed.
    2. On: Shoot. Frequency Low/On: Shoot. Frequency Standard/On: Shoot. Frequency High: Auto Dual Rec is carried out with the specified shooting frequency.

    The positions, orientation, expressions of faces are detected in order to shoot still images with the impressive compositions. If you want to change the size or quality of still images, use Quality (Dual Rec). Even when Auto Dual Rec is set to On, you can record still images by pressing the shutter button. Not that there might be a delay in pressing the shutter button and the image actually being taken if the processor is too busy.

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    Auto Obj. Framing

    When enabled, the Sony RX10 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Auto Mode
    1. Intelligent Auto: The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. (RAW and JPEG)
    2. Superior Auto: The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or backlit scenes. For low-lit or backlit scenes, if necessary the camera may shoot multiple images and create a composite image, etc., to record higher quality images than in Intelligent Auto mode. (only JPEG)
    Scene Selection

    This is more easily controlled via the right thumb wheel when you’re in SCN mode, but you can also select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here.

    The following scenes are available: Portrait, Infant, Night Portrait, Night Scene, Backlight Portrait, Backlight, Landscape, Macro, Spotlight and Low Light.

    High Frame Rate

    You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you want. These are available:

    • Program Auto
    • Aperture Priority
    • Shutter Priority
    • Manual Exposure

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 8)

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 9)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Audio Rec. Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter. Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates. Audio Rec Level is available only when the shooting mode is set to Movie. The Audio Rec Level settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the Microphone terminal input.

    : Turns up the audio recording level.

    −: Turns down the sound recording level.
    Audio Out Timing

    When using headphones, you can set echo cancelation while shooting.

    1. Live (default setting): Outputs audio without delay when recording movies. Select this setting when an audio deviation is a problem during sound monitoring.
    2. Lip Sync: Outputs video and audio in sync when recording movies. Select this setting to prevent undesirable variations between video and audio.
    Wind Noise Reduct.

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording. Set to ON.

    Memory Recall

    Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered in advance. Register shooting settings in advance by using the Memory function. If you set Memory recall after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the original settings may become invalid.

    Memory

    Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings in the product. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

    1. Set the product to the setting you want to register.
    2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Memory] → desired number.

    Items that can be registered:

    • Shooting mode
    • Shutter speed
    • Camera Settings
    • Optical zoom scale

    To recall registered settings:

    Set the mode dial to MR, then press the right/left side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired memory number.

    To change registered settings:

    Amend the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

    Movie

    You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting. When you adjust the aperture using the aperture ring while recording a movie, set the Aperture Click Switch to OFF. If you change the aperture value while shooting a movie with the Aperture Click Switch set to ON, the sound of the aperture ring will be recorded.

    Settings:

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    SteadyShot (stills)

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function in still photography. The SteadyShot functionality will give you about two stops advantage, reducing camera shake.

    SteadyShot (movie)

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function while recording video. The SteadyShot functionality will give you about two stops advantage, reducing camera shake.

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe RGB. If you don’t know what this means, leave it to standard. If you do, you’ll probably set it to Adobe RGB since it has an extended color range (useful for post-processing).

    Auto Slow Shutter

    This function allows you to slow the shutter speed down to 1/30 of a second. When the Auto Slow Shutter feature is turned on, it helps in reducing the amount of video noise that is recorded when shooting in dark areas.

    Audio Recording

    Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. On records audio in stereo, Off does not record any sound.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 1)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75 and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the full image. As I capture in RAW, I am very careful not to have any highlight clipping, in order to be able to possibly fully recover highlights in Lightroom.

    MF Assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier on Page 5 of the camera settings. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned ON if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif. Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on you screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During the course of photography history, rules have been developed on how to best compose the different elements within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is just composition at its simplest form. Many photographers with a broad understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag square are available

    Marker Display (video)

    Sets whether or not to display markers set using Marker Settings on the monitor while shooting movies. Set to ON or OFF.

    Marker Settings (video)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

    Available markers:

    • Center: Sets whether or not to show the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. Off / On.
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. Off / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1.
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. Off / 80% / 90%.
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 2)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen. ON or OFF.

    Auto Review

    You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto Review:

    10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec: Displays the registered image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time.

    If you perform a magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale

    DISP Button

    Finder:

    Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected for the viewfinder using Display Setting in shooting mode.

    Menu Item Details:

    • Graphic Display: Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
    • Display All Info.: Shows recording information.
    • No Disp. Info.: Does not show recording information.
    • Histogram: Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
    • Level: Indicates whether the product is level in both the horizontal and front-back directions. When the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to green.
    Peaking Level

    Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.

    You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, you can set the sensitivity to high, mid or low.

    Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualise what you’re focusing on.

    Monitor:

    Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected for the monitor using (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

    Menu Item Details:

    • Graphic Display: Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
    • Display All Info.: Shows recording information.
    • No Disp. Info.: Does not show recording information.
    • Histogram: Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
    • Level: Indicates whether the product is level in both the horizontal and front-back directions. When the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to green.
    • For viewfinder: Displays information suited for shooting with the viewfinder.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking  between Red, white and  yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    Exposure Set Guide

    Sets the guide displayed when exposure settings are changed on the shooting screen.  Nice tool when you’re getting to know the functionality of your  new camera. If you’re familiar with Sony’s feature, turn it OFF.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 3)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Live View Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialled in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier auto-focussing in low-light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Pre-AF

    When pre-AF is set to ON, the camera will continuously focus, even without half-pressing the shutter button. This can be draining to the battery, especially when using some lenses like the Zeiss Touit range. Set it to OFF.

    Zoom Speed

    Sets the zoom speed of the camera’s zoom lever (and the Sony remote). Experiment with what setting you like, either Slow or Fast.

    Zoom Setting

    The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature. You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.

    1. Optical zoom range: Images are magnified within the optical zoom range of this product.
    2. Smart Zoom range: Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image.
    3. Clear Image Zoom range: Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. Set Zoom Setting to On: ClearImage Zoom or On: Digital Zoom first.
    4. Digital Zoom range ( ) You can magnify images using an image process. When you select [On: Digital Zoom] for [Zoom Setting], you can use this zoom function.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 4)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Finder/Monitor

    This setting controls the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen. You can also assign this function to your preferred key.

    Settings:

    1. Auto: When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the display is switched to the Electronic Viewfinder automatically.
    2. Viewfinder(Manual): The screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
    3. Monitor(Manual): The Electronic Viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the screen.
    Release w/o Card

    Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted. Useful if you don’t want to get in the situation where you’re shooting without a card. Enable or Disable.

    AEL w/shutter

    Auto (default setting):

    Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.

    On:

    Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.

    Off:

    Does not correct the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
    Note: The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode.
    Note: Operation using the AEL button is prioritised over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Shutter Type

    You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

    Possible settings:

    1. Auto: The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.
    2. Mechanical Shut.: Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
    3. Electronic Shut.: Shoot with the electronic shutter only.

    The availability of flash shooting, shutter speed, and with or without shutter sound for each setting:

    Mechanical Shutter:

    • Flash
    • Shutter speed: BULB to 1/3200 second
    • Shutter sound: mechanical shutter sound and electronic shutter sound

    Electronic Shutter:

    • Flash
    • Shutter speed: 30 seconds to 1/32000 second
    • 2 Shutter sound: electronic shutter sound
    Exp. Comp. Set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation functionality ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash.

    Reset EV Comp.

    Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Exposure Comp. When you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to “0”

    Settings:

    • Maintain: Maintains the settings of the Custom Settings.
    • Reset: Resets the settings of Exposure Comp to zero.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 5)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Face Registration

    This is where you can register faces, it works only when face recogintion is set to ON (registered faces). This is an interesting functionality, as you can register faces of your subject (like at a wedding the bride and groom) and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register up to 8 faces (by taking a picture of them within this menu) and set a priority order.
    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    Write Date

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image. On or Off. The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen

    Function Menu Set

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Zoom Func. on Ring

    Sets the zoom functions when using the manual ring to change zoom scales. The settings for [Zoom Func. on Ring] are valid only when auto-focusing/

    Options:

    1. Standard: Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the manual ring.
    2. Quick: Zooms in/out to an angle of view corresponding to how far the manual ring has been rotated.
    3. Step: Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the manual ring.
    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.

    Available settings:

    1. Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode. (except when the mode dial is set to High Frame Rate).
    2. Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to Movie mode.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 6)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Dial/Wheel Lock

    You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the locked knob/control wheel by holding the Fn (Function) button down.

    (MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Send to Smartphone
    • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
    • You can either descide to choose which images you want to transfer from the camera or on the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, avialable for free in the apple or android store).
    • You’ll have to connect the camera via WiFi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A5100 screen.
    • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
    • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to computer

    You’ll need to physically connect the computer with the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View on TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see images and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    One-touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC) but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    (MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2)

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera quickly by pushing the WPS button.

    Access Point Set

    Here you can set up an access point for your camera to the internet.

    It enables the Sony ILCE-5100 to directly install PlayMemories apps from the internet. Works just like setting an access point (WiFi connection) on your phone.

    Edit Device Name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which RX10 is yours in certain situations.

    Disp MAC Address

    You can see the MAC address of the camera here, might be useful for some advanced configuration or troubleshooting

    SSID/PW Reset

    Reset the name and password of the wireless network the camera creates.

    Reset Network Set.

    Resets all network settings.
    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – PlayMemories settings – page 1

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Application List

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (wich allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iphone and Android) and the Playmemories camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your camera connection with your Wifi network).

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the camera with your mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Delete

    Delete on or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured images in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Select whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to automatically rotate images when you rotate the camera or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Enlarge

    Select an image and enlarge a portion of that image. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    Motion Interval ADJ

    You can also change the interval of the image tracking.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format).

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually change to your preferred setting. There is a color and greyscale chart displayed on screen to allow you to set it up to your liking.

    Finder Color Temp

    Chang the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t change anything here.

    Volume settings

    Change the playbak volume for recorded videe or demo’s.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when te camera achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a direct tab style menu layout.

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get famiar with what the different shooting modes actually do

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on yoour SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentaly delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality to High or Standard. (High uses more power).

    Pwr Save Time

    You can set time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. Either 30 Min, 5 Min, 2 Min, 1 Min or 10 Sec.

    PAL/NTSC mode

    change to either of this broadcasting standards according to which region of the world you live in.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically ( for in-store demonstration purposes), when the camera has not been operated for a certain time.

    TC/UB settings

    The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

    Possible settings:

    1. TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    2. TC Preset: Sets the time code. UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    3. TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code.
    4. TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    5. TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    6. UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    HDMI settings

    The HDMI settings page has a few options available for HDMI output.

    • HDMI Resolution: Auto (default setting), 2160p/1080p, 1080p, 1080i.
    • CTRL FOR HDMI: ON or OFF (ON allows you to operate the camera’s playback functions with a Sony BRAVIA Sync TV remote control).
    • HDMI Info. Display: ON displays the shooting information on you connected TV, OFF disables this.
    • TC Output: Sets whether or not to layer the time code information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting the signal to other professional-use devices. This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The camera sends the time code information as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to recognize the time data.
    • REC Control: If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop recording using the camera. ON or OFF.
    4K output Sel

    You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to external recording/playback devices.

    1. Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    2. HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    3. HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    4. HDMI Only(25p): Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Select what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.
    USB LUN setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise use Multi.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    USB Power Supply

    One of the most interesting features of this camera is the ability to charge the battery via USB. This works when connected to your computer by USB, but also with a USB car charger, or even a 20,000 Mah USB battery.

    This menu item sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or a USB device.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    Sets the date and time.

    • Daylight Savings: Selects Daylight Savings.
    • Date/Time: Sets the date and time.
    • Date Format: Selects the date and time display format
    Area Setting

    Sets the geographical area where you are using the camera.

    Copyright Info

    You can now write copyright information onto the still images. This information is then embedded into the EXIF data. You can write both photographer and copyright owner information.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Format

    Format your SD card before use, this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to the number of shots or resets it to start from 1.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organising events and locations. When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder will be automatically created.

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database in order to possibly retrieve lost images

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    Sony DSC-RX10 II setup, tips and tricks

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

  • Canon EOS R5 advanced manual

    Canon EOS R5 advanced manual 

    Introduction

    With 8K RAW videos, 45 megapixel photos, 8 stops image stabilization and a speed of 20 frames per second, the Canon EOS R5 is suitable for professional photo and videographers. For talented artist who want to specialize in any of these areas, the R5 is the new loyal ally.

    The highlights of the Canon R5:

    • Videos in 8K RAW
    • 4K video with 120fps
    • Photos of 45 megapixel
    • 8 stops image stabilization with RF lenses
    • Extensive autofocus options
    • Shoot 20 frames per second
    • Powerful battery
    • Make 8K RAW videos

    With the Canon R5 you capture 12-bit 8K video images with the full width of the full-frame sensor for a real cinema feel. The video is stored internally on a CFexpress card. You make 8K videos with continuous autofocus on eyes or faces. Ideal for making documentaries in run-and-gun style.

    Firstly, you might have landed here for another Canon mirrorless camera. Even though the menus are similar, it’s best to use my specific guide per camera. 

    You can find other manuals here:

    I have a very simple teaching method. Grab your camera, go to the menu section and just follow along. I will explain everything in detail here. 

    Canon EOS R5 Menu system

    The Shoot Menu (Red Camera Icon)



    Page Shoot 1 (SHOOT1) 

    Eosr501



    Image quality: you primarily need to decide whether to shoot RAW or JPEG. Raw records all the data from the sensor, Jpeg is basically a much smaller file that has all kinds of information already baked in. Most serious photographers shoot RAW, as this gives you the most flexible file to work with in an application like Adobe Lightroom.

    You’ll be able to recover more colour in the highlights of your image for instance, and pull more detail out of the shadows with a Raw file than with a Jpeg. The only downside are the larger files and the fact that of course you’ll need to develop them later on. RAW file average size of 80 MB an JPEG file average size of 15 MB with the EOS R5.

    You’ll see that the is also a cRAW option, this is a format that uses lossy compression to reduce file sizes by roughly 40%. This is absolutely fine to use, the deterioration is negligible.

    If you decide to shoot Jpeg, you can choose between Large, Medium or Small, each with a Fine or Normal setting. Check the table above for the relative pixel sizes for each setting. I would advise Large and Fine of course.


    Dual Pixel RAW: You’ll need to set the previous image quality to RAW or cRAW in order use Dual Pixel RAW. This setting produces images containing dual pixel information from the image sensor. Don’t confuse this setting the type of pixel shift technology like Pentax uses. 

    Dual Pixel RAW uses the unique dual photodiode per pixel design of the 45 Megapixel sensor. A photodiode converts light into electrical current, and it the case of the Canon EOS R5, each of these 45 million pixels actually register light twice. Because these 2 photodiodes occupy actual physical space, you can imagine that the two register your point of autofocus slightly differently.

    Now the camera itself is constantly calculating what the best fine focus point is between these two, and this is called A+B. When Dual Pixel AF is set to on, not only this A+B signal is recorded, but also the A signal (from one of the two diodes) separately. This means that Canon’s proprietary RAW developer now has access to the normal camera output (A+B), as well as the A signal and the B signal (A+B-A=B).

    What this means for you in a practical sense is that you’ll be able to slightly shift, or a better word is fine-tune your point of autofocus. This is not a miracle worker, as remember the light is registered twice per pixel, and there are 45 million pixels on a 36 x 24mm surface. But it can help you if the focus is just slightly off, like for instance you barely missed focus on the eye at f/1.4. 

    Another caveat is that it only really works at focal lengths between 50 and 200mm, and at large apertures.


    Cropping/aspect ratio: this describes how square (1:1) or wide (16:9) your image is. It’s expressed as a figure, like this: width:height (width always comes first). The aspect ratio of a Full Frame sensor is 3:2, and you should use this if you want to use the full surface of the sensor. Cropping can also be done later.  

    • Full (3:2): the native sensor dimension of the full frame mirrorless Canon EOS R6.
    • 1.6x: this is wat is called crop mode, and is used when you use EF-S lenses from the APS-C cameras.
    • 1:1: a basic square setting.
    • 4:3: native resolution of a micro-four-thirds camera .
    • 16:9: for a wider perspective.


    Page Shoot 2 (SHOOT2)

    Eosr502



    Expo.comp./AEB: Exposure Compensation and Auto Exposure Bracketing.


    Exposure compensation: If you believe that your camera is over- or underexposing your images, or you want to do this for creative reasons, you can change the level of exposure by a scale of plus or minus 3 EV.


    Auto Exposure Bracketing.: Using the exposure compensation setting, you can capture images at different exposure levels, and then select the optimal image later with a +/- 5 EV scale. These two functions can the be used in combination.



    ISO speed settings for photos


    ISO speed: can either be set to Automatic or determine an appropriate value for yourself. Say for landscapes when using a tripod this is generally set to what is called base ISO 100. ISO 100 would give you the optimal quality for this sensor, but for many other types of photography you’ll need a higher ISO in order to have a fast enough shutter speed and hence no movement in your images. Leave this on auto for most uses.


    ISO Auto: This is used to set the max for Auto, from 400 to the top value of 40000. When raising the ISO value, you are effectively raising the sensitivity of the sensor by boosting the output. This leads to more and more noise with every doubling of power. A Maximum of 12800 is as far as I would go with the Canon EOS R5.



    HDR PQ Settings

    PQ in HDR PQ refers to the gamma curve of the input signal for displaying HDR images. HDR PQ settings enable the camera to produce HDR images conforming to the PQ specification defined in ITU-R BT.2100 and SMPTE ST.2084 (with actual display depending on monitor performance).

    • Shots are captured as HEIF or RAW images.
    • PQ stands for Perceptual Quantization.


    Auto Lighting Optimizer


    Auto-corrects image brightness and contrast. This only affects Jpeg and not your Raw files, but it can be handy for the Jpeg shooters out there. Have a go and see if you like the effect set to low or standard.



    Highlight tone priority


    Improves gradation in highlights to avoid over exposure in bright subjects. What the camera does in highlight tone priority is underexpose the image to avoid clipping highlights, then boost the shadows up to give the appearance of a wider dynamic range in the jpegs. It does the same thing you might do when processing raw files, except it just applies it to jpegs. Another great feature to experiment with. Either Off or enabled.



    Anti Flicker Shoot.

    With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is detectable.

    If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result. With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is minimal.


    External speedlite control: Using this menu item, you can adjust flash power. The Flash Control option also enables you to customizeas well as control an external flash head.


    • Flash firing: Normally, this option is set to Enable. If you want to disable the flash, you can choose Disable instead. However, you don’t have to take this step in most cases.
    • E-TTL II meter: This option enables you to switch from the default flash metering approach, called Evaluative. In this mode, the camera exposes the background using ambient light when possible and then sets the flash power to serve as fill light on the subject. If you instead select the Average option, the flash is used as the primary light source, meaning that the flash power is set to expose the entire scene without relying on ambient light. Typically, this results in a more powerful (and possibly harsh) flash lighting and dark backgrounds.


    • Slow synchro: Slow Sync Flash is a function found on many cameras that tells your camera to shoot with both a longer shutter speed as well as firing the flash. This means you get the best of both worlds above and can both get a relatively sharp shot of your main subject as well as get some ambient light from the background and foreground.
    • Safety FE: The camera automatically changes the shutter speed or aperture value when the flash fires to avoid overexposing and blowing out the highlights in the scene.


    • Flash func. Setting and External flash C.Fn setting: these last 2 options on the Flash Control list relate to how to control external flashes from the EOS R5 itself. This depends very much on what flash you’re using, and you should consult the flash manual in order to set this up.





    Page Shoot 3 (SHOOT3)

    Eosr503




    White balance


    Normally AWB (auto white balance) will do just fine but you also have the option to change this to AWB W (auto white balance with white priority This setting is amazing for indoor lighting), Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, White fluorescent, Flash, Custom and Colour Temperature adjustable.




    Custom white balance


    This setting brings up compatible images to use. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.




    WB Shift/Bkt.


    White balance shift is a setting on the EOS R5 camera that allows a photographer to bias the colours in images in either blue, amber, magenta or green directions. This colour shift can be used to add or remove colour shifts that may occur when shooting in mixed lighting conditions. Typically think flash and daylight, flash and indoor lights, street lights and daylight and so on. White balance can be shifted from -9 to +9 in both blue / amber and green / magenta directions, or combinations of blue/amber and green/magenta shifts. The blue/amber shift is equal to five mired for each step.



    Color space

    sRGB is what is used online, and Adobe RGB has a more extended colour profile that mimics the human eye. You might think that the latter is preferable, but unless you print a lot of photos with professional equipment, Adobe RGB is more hassle than its worth since you’ll need to proof every picture you want to use online and convert it to sRGB.


    Picture Style

    Picture style allows you to take photos in the color tones that Canon deems most suitable to each subject . These include normal presets like Standard, Portrait and Landscape but also advanced scenarios like Monochrome, Fine Detail, Neutral and Faithful.

    All these picture styles can be individually adjusted to taste with adjustments like Sharpness, Fine detail, Threshold, Contrast, Saturation, Hue. These adjustments can be saved in 3 user defined slots and even transferred to other EOS cameras.

    Auto, Standard, Portait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, 2 and 3.

    Set to Neutral with Strength = 1 (Note: the low contrast “Neutral” picture style provides a histogram on the back of the camera that most-accurately shows me blown highlights and blocked shadows on the camera LCD. I usually change the Picture Style to “Standard” in DPP after capture.)




    Clarity


    You can adjust image clarity, as determined by the contrast of image edges. Set toward the negative end to make images look softer or toward the positive end for a sharper appearance.



    Lens aberration correction: digital technology provides the ability to adjust images in-camera. One area this can be useful is in correcting for optical performance. By mapping the performance of each camera and lens at a variety of focal lengths, focus distances and apertures, it is possible to correct for these irregularities and bring the lens performance closer to ‘perfection’. These corrections are only available for photos captured in the JPEG file format. There is no reason to turn this off, except if you’re noticing a slow down when shooting in burst mode, then this might be the reason.


    • Peripheral illumination correction: This is called lens light fall-off or drop in the corners or vignetting.
    • Distortion correction: If you’re shooting with a wide-angle lens you may have noticed that at the wide end you will most likely find some distortion. This corrects distortion for any lens in the lens database.
    • Digital Lens Optimizer: Performs high- level correction for lens aberration in-camera
    • Chromatic aberr corr: Automatically remove color fringing due to Chromatic aberration.
    • Diffraction correction: a camera and lens specific correction that uses a profile of the lens used to ameliorate the effects of diffraction caused by small apertures (usually f/11 and beyond where there will be decrease in sharpness).

    All options “OFF” (though Chromatic Aberration correction is a good option to leave enabled for most).


    Page Shoot 4 (SHOOT4)

    Eosr504



    Long exp. noise reduction

    Turn On noise reduction for exposures of 1 second or longer with the Canon EOS R5. This function takes a second black or dark frame (with the shutter closed) with the identical shutter time of your first photo. The noise in this frame is then subtracted from the original photo. This method is the most reliable type of noise reduction, as the noise is measured specifically at that place and time with the same level of humidity and temperature. All factors that can contribute to noisy images especially in long exposures.

    Some photographers however find it annoying to have to wait for this to finish as it doubles the time. You can turn it off and experiment with other types of noise reduction in Lightroom or any other photo editor if you shoot RAW. 


    High ISO speed NR

    You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: Standard, High or Low. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

    Multishot: This technique automatically combines four images captured at once to reduce noise. Compared to setting High ISO speed NR to High, this feature minimises loss of image quality while reducing noise. Best technique for Jpeg shooters.

    Again, noise reduction is destructive to images details. I prefer to add noise reduction sparingly during post processing.


    Dust Delete Data

    This function allows you to download your shots to your computer using the canon software. The software will analyse the images and any dust spots that show up on multiple images will be registered. This database is then relayed back to the Canon R that will ignore the pixels with dust on.

    I don’t think this is necessary, as periodically wet cleaning yourself or by a professional should be part of your camera cleaning routine anyway.


    Page Shoot 5 (SHOOT5)

    Eosr505


    Multiple Exposure

    As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can select how the images will be merged into a single image.

    • On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority) Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you check the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
    • On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority) Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects.Continuous shooting is possible without the following operations: menu viewing, image review after capture, image playback, and undo last image.

    Multi-expos ctrl setting:

    • Additive: The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively. Based on the number of exposures setting, set a negative exposure compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure compensation amount. (Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures: -2 stops)
    • Average: Based on the number of exposures setting, negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard exposure.

    • Bright/Dark: Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the relative brightness (or darkness) of the image.

    HDR Mode

    You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reducedfor a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.
    With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures(standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

    You can select the dynamic range of the HDR images and an effect like Natural, Art standard, Vivid, Bold or Embossed.

    HDR images will always be saved as Jpeg!


    Focus Bracketing

    When enabled, the focus bracketing feature instructs the camera to take a series of pictures with the lens’ focus distance setting increasing between each image captured until the specified number of images are captured or until infinity focus is reached. The resulting set of images can then be focus stacked during post-processing with the result being an increased depth of field, potentially by a significant amount, while avoiding the softening effects of diffraction caused by very narrow apertures use.

    This technique is commonly used in macro photography as the depth of field is typically extremely shallow at very close focus distances. Landscape photographers frequently use this technique to keep entire scenes that include a close foreground subject in focus.

    There are four settings used to control the focus bracketing feature.

    1. Activate Focus Bracketing (Enable/Disable)
    2. Input number of shots (2 to 999)
    3. Focus increment (1-10)
    4. Exposure smoothing (Enable/Disable)

    The number of shots instructs the camera to capture up to the specified number of images. I say “up to” because the camera stops taking photographs when infinity focus distance is reached and this may only require a small number of images regardless of the number of shots setting. Use this setting to limit the camera to a shorter focus distance range, or set the number very high to ensure that all distances including infinity are covered.

    The focus increment setting is definitely the vaguest on this list. This setting deals with the granularity of the focus distance adjustment between each shot with 1 requesting fine increments and 10 requesting wide increments. Specific distance changes are not able to be input and with the depth of field increasing with distance, a non-specific increment value makes sense. Focus brackets always start with the initial focus distance and proceed toward infinity (the ending distance cannot be directly specified). “The wider the pre-set lens aperture, and the closer the lens is to the subject for the first shot, the finer the focus increments should normally be, and the more Focus Bracketed shots should be dialed-in.”

    Exposure smoothing is disabled by default, but when enabled, the camera keeps image brightness consistent through the image set. This feature is primarily useful for compensating for light transmission losses when lenses, especially macro models, are focused at very close distances.

    Optional is for the camera to create a new folder on the memory card before the bracketed sequence starts, making it easy to separate a potentially large number of images. Tapping the “Folder +” icon creates a new folder and subsequent images are saved there.


    Page Shoot 6 (SHOOT6)

    Eosr506


    Interval timer

    For fully customisable time-lapse photos and movies.


    Bulb Timer

    This is used for long exposures. Turn this, on, set the exposure timer to your desired setting and then shoot a Bulb exposure.  If you want to end the exposure early, just tap the shutter.


    Shutter Mode

    Mechanical: use the traditional mechanical shutter system.

    Elec. 1st-curtain: the EOS R5 will use the electronic shutter for the front, first curtain and the mechanical shutter for the second curtain. Possible problems include only half of a sunstar flare and it can introduce slightly nervous bokeh.

    Electronic: uses the full electronic shutter functionality. This is the fastest shutter available but can cause problems like rolling shutter in for instance helicopter blades and can’t be used with flashes.


    Release shutter without card

    If this is set to ON, you want be able to use the shutter button if there is no SD card inserted in the camera. This is a security feature, so that you won’t start shooting images without actually recording them on an SD card. On the other hand, if you’re just testing the features of the camera, you probably won’t wan’t to store these files, and then you can leave it ON.


    Page Shoot 7 (SHOOT7)

    Eosr507


    IS (Image Stabilizer) Mode

    You can turn of the sensor stabilisation system here


    Touch Shutter

    If the Touch Shutter function is set to On, you can take shots easily by having the camera focus on your subject and adjust the brightness simply by touching. I don’t use this function, but if you’re coming from a smartphone, you could find it very useful.



    Image review: You can modify the amount of time the image displays on the LCD monitor after your EOS R6 writes it to the memory card. You can set the preview time from 2 to 8 seconds or display the image until you turn off the camera. Or you can turn it OFF if you don’t want this.

    I turn it off as I can always press the play button if I decide to review a shot I’ve just taken..

    • Off
    • 2 sec
    • 4 sec
    • 8 sec
    • Hold



    High Speed Display

    The  Canon EOS R5 must be set to high speed frame rate to enable this option. This setting lets the EVF update faster than the 5 FPS rate at which the EOS R5 shoots in Continuous Hi mode. Doesn’t work with adapted lenses.

    Set to ON. The camera must be set to Servo AF and high speed continuous frame rate to enable this option.



    Metering timer

    When you half press the shutter (or use back button focus) in one of the creative zone modes and then release it, the camera’s meter takes a reading and sets the exposure values. These values time out and disappear after the amount of time set by this option. You have to half press again to take a new reading at that point. From 4, 8, 16, 30 sec too 1, 10, 30 min.


    Expo. Simulation

    When ‘Exp.SIM’ (which stands for Exposure Simulation) is on, indicates the image you are seeing on the rear screen and EVF is what the final image will look like. You can leave this on except when using flash in the studio as you’ll only see a dark frame in that case.



    Shooting info. Disp.

    There are a few sub menus here, let’s see what they do.

    Screen info. settings: these settings give 5 different screen options. The first 3 allow you to configure the data overlaid on live view and save them as 3 separate screen types. You can turn on or off the basic shooting info (the data at top and bottom of screen), the detailed shooting info (the icons running down the left and right sides), whether the data acts as a touch button or not – if not, it loses the white frame and grey background – this applies to the Q menu button, the touch shoot button, the magnify button, the shutter speed, aperture, EV compensation scale and ISO value and “buttonizes” or “debuttonizes” them all at once; the histogram; the level gauge.

    The fourth screen style is just the AF targets and the exposure info when it is active, and the last screen type is the black, non-live view DSLR-style info screen.  These options are the ones you cycle through with the Info button when shooting with the camera – effectively this section allows you to customise them to taste.

    Still within this submenu we haveL VF info/toggle settings (3 different EVF choices – one with basic shooting info under the screen, the other two configurable to individually add and combine as desired the vertical detailed shooting info icons, histogram, level gauge].  Like the previous item, it’s a way of customising what you get when you cycle through the styles of VF display whilst shooting when you use the Info button to do so.

    Then the submenu has Grid display [Off, 3×3, 6×4, 3×3+diag], Histogram disp [Brightness/RGB, Large/Small], Reset.  That’s the end of this submenu.

    Set to: Screen info. settings: Enable 1 (press Info, disable basic shooting info and enable Electronic level), 3 and 4.



    Page Shoot 8 (SHOOT8)

    Eosr508


    VF display format

    Display 1 shows the Live View image across the entire viewfinder screen. This allows you to fully maximize use of the EVF display, but shooting icons such as those indicating white balance settings and the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be overlaid on the sides of the viewfinder image. If you do not fancy that, you may prefer [Display 2], which features a smaller Live View image, with the shooting icons in the borders surrounding the image.
    The icons displayed are customisable to some extent, and rotate accordingly when you switch to portrait orientation.


    Disp. Performance

    You can set this to Power-saving to conserve battery life, even though refresh rates will be a bit slower than with the Smooth setting.


    The Autofocus Menu (AF) 



    AF Page 1

    Eosr509


    AF operation

    One Shot: for Still Subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

    • When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light in the viewfinder will also light up.
    • With evaluative metering, the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved.
    • While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

    Servo: This AF operation is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.

    • The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
    • When the AF point selection is automatic, the camera first uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

    AF method

    Face + Tracking:

    • the Canon R searches for faces in the frame. If it finds one, it displays a white focus frame over the face.
    • In a group shot where more than one face is recognized by the camera, you see arrows on either side of the focus frame. To choose a different face as the focusing target, tap the face or use the Multi-controller to move the target frame over the face.
    • To lock focus on the face, press and hold the shutter button halfway down or press and hold the AF-ON button. When focus is locked, the focus frame turns green, as shown on the right above, and the camera emits a beep. (Disable the sound effect via the Beep option on Shooting Menu 1.) If focus isn’t successful, the focus frame turns red.

    Center AF: focus point is situated in the center of the screen.

    1 point AF: only one AF point is used for extremely precise autofocus.

    Expand AF area: Focusing uses one AF point and points above, below, and to the left and right. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Although Servo AF requires you to focus on a subject initially with an AF point, focusing is easier with this AF method than with Zone AF.

    Expand AF area: Around: Focusing uses one AF point and surrounding points. Enables focusing over a wider area than F point expansion. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Servo AF operation is the same as for AF point expansion.

    Zone AF: Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than AF point expansion, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.

    Large Zone AF: Vertical: Uses auto selection AF in a vertical Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AFpoint expansion and also effective formoving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.

    Large Zone AF: Horizontal: Uses auto selection AF in a horizontal Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.


    Subject to detect

    You can choose between People, animals or no priority.


    Eye Detection AF

    When AF Method is set to Face Detect + Tracking, the entire active AF area (see the colored outlines in the graphics above) is used for focusing.  And, if a human face is detected, the Face Detect technology has been enhanced — the camera doesn’t simply focus on the most prominent face in the scene.  Instead, it now is able to detect the nearest eye on that face, and puts a smaller focus box on that eye.  If that person moves around the picture area, the Eye Detection AF continues to track that eye, as long as it remains visible. 

    When Eye Detection AF is active, you’ll see a large, outer box indicating that Face Detection has recognized a human face.  And within it, a smaller box will surround the actual eye that is being concentrated upon for Eye Detection AF.

    This means that sharp focus will more than ever be placed on the “leading” eye of your subjects, whether you’re shooting portraits or candid pictures.  Where many experienced photographers might have previously made the effort to change to a single AF point, and move it manually to cover the face of a human subject, the new Eye Detection AF technology means that the process can be left to the EOS R5 in many cases.

    All that has to be done to activate Eye Detection AF is to Enable Eye Detection AF in the 3rd Shooting Menu screen, and be sure that Face Detect + Tracking is the active AF Method.  It will function in most shooting modes.

    While Eye Detect AF will normally focus upon the eye nearest to the camera, if you want to concentrate on the subject’s other eye, that’s easy to do — just press the AF Point Select button, on the back of the camera, twice.  You’ll see the smaller “box” surrounding the detected eye jump to the subject’s other eye.

    For Face Detection AF, and the more advanced Eye Detection AF to function, the camera basically has to be able to identify typical human facial features two eyes, a nose, and a mouth.  Accordingly, there can be some limits to the EOS R5’s Eye Detection AF:

    • It will not function with Servo AF, so it’s unable to work with moving subjects (therefore, Eye Detection AF is not possible in Sports Mode or Panning Mode).  
    • It’s disabled if you’re using the Miniature effect or Fish-eye effect settings, within the Creative Filters modes.

    • Eye Detection AF cannot be used when recording video (overall Face Detection is possible during video recording, including when continuous Movie Servo AF is active).
    • The primary face in the scene needs to be sufficiently close to take up a certain amount of space in the picture — if a detected face is too distant or small in the frame, the EOS R5 will revert to conventional Face Detection, and you won’t see the smaller “box” displayed over a subject’s eye before you take the picture.  
    • Eye Detect AF may have problems if the subject’s eyes are partially or fully closed.
    • The primary face needs to be turned so it’s essentially facing toward the camera, and the eyes need to be somewhat in the camera’s direction as well.  While direct eye contact with the camera isn’t required, if the subject’s eyes are angled significantly to one side or the other, the EOS R5’s Eye Detection AF may not be able to detect the eye nearest the camera (again, it will usually revert to ordinary Face Detection, or conventional Automatic AF point selection).
    • If one or both of the subject’s eyes are in deep shadow, Eye Detection AF (and sometimes overall Face Detection AF) may have difficulty functioning.
    • Sunglasses, excessive make-up around the eyes, masks, and so on will usually prevent the Eye Detection AF from being able to detect and focus upon the nearest eye.  And, like Face Detection, it’s designed to detect human eyes… it normally will not work with animals or other non-human subjects.


    Continuous AF

    Enable or disable continuous AF where the camera constantly tries to acquire focus, even without pressing the shutter. Turn this Off.


    Touch & drag AF settings

    Touch & Drag AF basically means that you can drag the desired autofocus point to anywhere on the screen. This is much faster than any other method to do this.

    You can select the active touch area: Whole panel, Right, Left, Top Right, Btm Right, Top Left, Btm Left. I have it set to the Bottom Left since this allows you to look through the EVF and change the focus point easily at the same time.



    AF Page 2

    AF page 2


    MF peaking settings

    Peaking is a focussing aide when the camera is set to manual focus. The in-focus area will have a type of coloured noise superimposed onto scene in the EVF or on the screen. This is of course not stored, it’s merely an aide that helps you determine where your focus lies and if your subject will be in focus. Very handy feature, I have it set to the Color red and Level High.



    Focus Guide

    Setting Focus guide to On provides a visual guide that shows which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. The guide frame is displayed near any eyes that are detected for the main subject when for instance Face +Tracking is used. 


    AF Assist Beam Firing

    You can enable or disable the assist beam when using a flash that has one. 


    AF Page 3

    AF Page 3


    Servo AF

    Servo AF is a brand new feature. This AF operation is for moving subjects in different scenarios.

    1. Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting: can be used in the majority od cases where you’re photographing movement with the EOS R5. For instance, fast track running, ice skating, boxing, etc.
    2. Case 2 Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles: A preset for ball sports where you want the camera to track people’s movement but not the objects they are playing with.
    3. Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points: Great for roadside sports where you want the camera to acquire instant focus when your subjects enter the frame. Good examples are motor sports and cycling. 
    4. Case 4: For subjects that accelerate/decelerate quickly: a different scenario from the other three, where sudden changes in movement can be detected and the EOS R5 will adjust autofocus speed accordingly.
    5. Case A (Auto) Tracking automatically adapts to subject movement: will switch between all four scenarios accordingly. Though I would recommend choosing the most suited scenario for optimal performance. 

    In each scenario, you can fine-tune tracking sensitivity and accelerate/decelerate tracking performance. 


    AF Page 4

    AF Page 4


    Lens electronic MF

    Disable after One-Shot AF: turns off manual fine-tune focus after one shot in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button.

    One shot enabled: allows you to fine-tune focus manually in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button.

    One shot enabled (magnify): allows you to fine-tune focus manually in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button and magnifies your point of focus. (very cool)

    Disable in AF mode: entirely disables manual fine-tune focus in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button.


    One-Shot AF release prior.

    Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot. You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing during continuous shooting after the first shot with AI Servo AF. Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed.


    Switching tracked subjects

    Set the ease of switching to other subjects from the subjects currently tracked. Can be used in ‘Face+Tracking’, ‘Zone AF’ and ‘Large Zone AF: Horizontal’ and ‘Large Zone AF: Vertical’


    Lens Drive when AF impossible

    This setting can effectively speed up your action photography, especially with tele lenses. Super telephoto lenses can become grossly out of focus during continuous focus search, taking more time to achieve focus the next time. 


    Limit AF Methods

    You’ll find a list of all AF methods here, you can select and deselect which ones you use or don’t use, so that there’s less clutter in the AF Method Menu.


    AF method selection control

    With this menu option a user can select their ‘AF method selection control’ with either the use of the M-Fn Button or the Main Dial.


    Orientation linked AF Point

    Also called autofocus point orientation.

    You can select up to three different AF point selection methods corresponding to whether you hold the camera in a landscape orientation, portrait with the grip up or portrait with the grip down orientation. Simply rotating the camera will choose whichever AF point or AF point selection method you have set for that orientation.

    This is very useful for many situations. At a sport game for example you may choose to use the central point when shooting in a landscape format but the middle top AF point for focusing on a face when shooting in a portrait mode.

    It is also possible to select an alternate, or favourite, AF point that you can switch to immediately by using one of the customisable buttons on the EOS R5. This customisation can also be used to select an alternate set of AF settings that can be recalled using a single button press. You may find this useful when photographing a running race for example. You may wish to use two different AF point selection methods, one for the start of the race and one for the end as the runners dip for the line.


    AF Page 5

    AF Page 5


    Initial Servo AF pt for…

    This setting allows you to select a specific point for the AF system to start tracking things when AF is set to specific Autofocus modes.


    Focus ring rotation  Yes, the same goes for the lens focus ring, this can be reversed. 
    RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity  When using Canon RF lenses, you can control the sensitivity of the focus ring. 
    Sensitivity- AF pt select

    The sensitivity of the Multi- Controller joystick AF point selection can be adjusted to a user’s desire with the EOS R5.


    Playback Menu (blue playback icon)


    Page Play 1 settings (PLAY1)

    Playback menu page 1



    Protect images

    You can select how to protect and unprotect an image from deletion on the EOS R5. Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection. If you erase all the images, only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.

    You can choose to Select images, Select range, All images in folder, unprotect all images in folder, All images on card or unprotect all images on card.


    Erase images

    Select and erase images by selecting a range or All images in folder orAll images on card.


    Rotate image


    Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed.


    • Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review.
    • If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not rotate automatically for playback.
    • If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image.

    Change mov rotate info

    You can manually change movie orientation information (which determines which side is up)


    Rating

    You can rate images on a scale of 1–5


    Image copy

    With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically. You’ll need to setup the Wifi connection first. 


    Page Play 2 settings (PLAY2)

    Playback menu page 2

    Print order


    You can connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print your images directly. This setting takes you to the selection screen where you can select a single image, multiple images for printing and the general set up. See the tutorial below on how to connect to a smartphone, it is the same procedure to connect to a printer




    Photobook Set-up


    This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer. 


    When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer.



    Page Play 3 settings (PLAY3)

    Playback menu page 3



    RAW image processing (RAW/DPRAW)

    Being able to perform RAW image post-processing right after shooting on a camera is a function that comes in very handy.

    These settings are available on the Canon R:

    • Brightness adjustment: EV-1, EV-2/3, EV-1/3, EV±0, EV+1/3, EV+2/3, EV+1
    • White balance: WB: Shot settings, Auto, Day Light, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash, Colour temperature
    • Picture Style: Picture Style: Shot settings, Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, User Def. 2, User Def. 3
    • Auto Lighting Optimizer: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • High ISO speed Noise Reduction: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • Image quality: write small, medium and large jpeg files in fine or standard resolution.
    • Peripheral illumination correction: Enable/Disable
    • Chromatic aberration: Enable/Disable
    • Diffraction correction: Enable/Disable


    DPRAW processing

    It’s possible to process the dual pixel raw files internally too.



    Resize

    You can resize your RAW images internally and save them in-camera for posting on social media for instance.


    Cropping

    Complementary to the other in-camera RAW processing feature, you can crop your image or multiple images here freely or according to preset dimensions.


    HEIFF to jpeg

    The EOS R5 capable of recording (HDR-PQ Shooting) still images in HEIF file format. These 10-bit files feature broader tonal range and bit depth in-comparison to 8-bit JPEG image, allowing for even more highlight detail to be captured, when displayed on HDR-compliant monitors or via HDR printing workflow. you can convert these HEIF files to jpeg here.



    Page Play 4 settings (PLAY4)

    Playback menu page 4


    Slide show

    You can setup and start an in-camera slideshow here.


    Set image search conditions

    You’ll find lots of factors to choose here, I honestly don’t know why this was implemented and never use it.


    Magnificatn (apx)

    you can set the starting magnification and initial position for the magnified view.

    • 1x (no magnification): The image will not be magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display.

    • 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center): he magnified view will start at the image center at the selected magnification.
    • Actual size (from selected point): The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The magnified view will start at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo was taken with manual focus, the magnified view will start at the image center.

    • Same as last magnification (from center): The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view. The magnified view starts from the image center.

    Set to “Actual size (from selected pt)”. It allows one button press during playback to zoom deeply into the image.


    Image jump w/dial

    This setting selects how much of the jump your image library will tale when you turn the dial.

    You can select one by one, jump 10, jump by specified number, by date, by folder, display movies only, stills only, protected only or display by image rating.



    Switch dial

    Switch the functionality of the dials here. 


    Rate/Mic button function

    You can change the functionality of those buttons here. 


    Memo audio quality 

    It’s possible to attach voice memos to files with the Canon EOS R5. You can select the record quality here. 


    Page Play 5 settings (PLAY5)

    Eosr518


    Playback information display


    You can enable up to 9 individual screens – all except the first, which is the basic shooting info overlay, allow the histogram to be specified as brightness or RGB, and in some cases, both. Enable to avoid too many playback options. 



    Highlight alert

    The Highlight Alert setting will show you where the overexposed areas in your images are located.  The image preview will blink in areas that are completely white and have no detail.

    Set to Enable, it causes overexposed pixels to blink.


    AF point disp.


    This setting either shows or hides the number of AF points on screen and in your EVF.


    Playback Grid

    Sets the number of images or previews in the grid when you select Playback.

    Set to 3×3, it helps with checking alignment.



    Movie play count

    Set the movie play count to either recording time or Time Code for sync. 


    HDMI HDR output.

    You can choose to turn on HDR in the HDMI output.


    Wifi Menu


    Wifi page 1

    Wifi page 1


    Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection

    On this screen, you can change the wireless communication function settings.

    Wi-Fi settings

    • You can set whether to Enable or Disable the wireless communication function.
    • Password: Set to None to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).
    • Connection history: You can set whether to Show or Hide the history of the Wi-Fi connected devices.
    • Auto send images to computer: With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically.
    • Send to smartphone after shot: Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically.
    • MAC address: You can check the MAC address of the camera.

    Wi-Fi function:

    • Communicate with smartphones
    • Remote control (EOS Utility)
    • Print from Wi-Fi printer
    • Send images to Web service

    Bluetooth function:  Displays the screen on which you can set or check the Bluetooth functions.

    Send images to smartphone: While the camera is connected to a smartphone, use this function to send images stored in the camera to the smartphone.

    Nickname: You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard.

    Clear settings: Clear all wireless communication settings.


    Airplane mode

    Airplane mode disables all wireless communication. If you’re not using it, best to turn it on all the time. This also saves battery life.


    Wi-Fi settings

    You can enable or disable the WiFi functionality here. 


    Bluetooth Settings

    You can enable or disable the Bluetooth functionality here. 


    Nickname

    You can change the default name of your camera here. This is the name that you’ll see on your phone when trying to connect with your EOS R5.


    GPS Device settings

    When you’re shooting while connected to a compatible smart device via Bluetooth, EOS R5 can collect GPS data and automatically add it to your images using the Canon Camera Connect app. It makes identifying locations easy and provides a useful editing feature for when you’re back home.


    Image transfer

    With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically. You’ll need to setup the Wifi connection first. 


    Wifi Page 2

    Wifi Page 2


    Reset communication settings

    Reset all WiFi and communication settings to the factory defaults. 


    Set Up Menu (Spanner, gear icon)


    Set Up Menu Page 1 (SET UP1)

    Set Up Menu Page 1



    Record func+card/folder select

    f you insert a CF card and SD card, you can select the recording method and select which card to use for recording and playing back images.

    • Standard: Images will be recorded to the card selected with Record/play.
    • Auto switch card: Same as with the Standard setting, but if the card becomes full, the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record images. When the camera switches to the other card, a new folder will be created automatically.
    • Rec. separately: You can set the image-recording quality for each card. Each image is recorded to the CF and SD cards at the image recording quality you have set. 
    • Rec. to multiple: Each image is recorded to the CF and SD cards simultaneously at the same image size. You can also select RAW+JPEG.

    When separately is set, the maximum burst will decrease greatly When Rec. separately or to multiple is set, the image will be recorded under the same file number to the CF and SD cards. Also, the LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card having the lower number. If one of the cards becomes full, Card full will be displayed and shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set the recording method to Standard or Auto switch card and select the card with space remaining to continue shooting


    File numbering

    You can set the file numbering for each new shot to Continuous or Auto Reset/Manual Reset. Continuous will consecutively number your photos. Auto reset will reset the numbering every time an SD card is inserted, and Manual reset will reset the numbering once.


    File name

    Choose your own image naming scheme here.


    Format card

    You should format your card in-camera every time you insert a memory card when starting a new session. This to make sure that there won’t be any writing errors. Remember that formatting will erase all the images on the card, and won’t even be recoverable if you choose the low level format option.


    Auto rotate


    Auto rotate automatically rotates your images that are shot in portrait mode to fit the screen size. You can turn this on or off and decide whether this will behaviour will also apply to images imported to your PC using the canon software .


    Add video rotate info

    add rotation info to video files or not. 


    Date/Time/Zone

    Select the date, time and worldwilde zone of your Canon EOS R5. 


    Set Up Menu Page 2 (SET UP2)

    Set Up Menu Page 2


    Video system

    select either PAL or NTSC video systems depending on your area. 


    Help Text Size

    Select the size of the optional menu help messages between small, medium or large.


    Beep

    You can either enable or disable the beep when you engage the shutter as well as when you touch the screen.

    Set to disable as you don’t to hear you beeping camera setting changes or focus confirmation.


    Headphone volume

    Set the volume of the headphone outputs of the Canon EOS R5.


    Power saving

    The power will shut off in the following circumstances. Press the power button again to restore power.

    Shooting Mode Powers down approximately 3 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera. The LCD monitor automatically turns off 1 minute* after the last control is accessed even if [Auto Power Down] is set to [Off]. Press any button other than the power button to turn the LCD monitor back on.
    Playback Mode or connected to a Printer. Powers down approximately 5 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera.

    Eco mode

    This function allows you to conserve battery power.When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption.


    Set Up Menu Page 3 (SET UP3)

    Set Up Menu Page 3


    Screen/viewfinder display

    You can select to display or hide the operating state of the R5 on the LCD screen/viewfinder . The display also appears on a TV connected to the camcera.


    Screen brightness

    Change the brightness of the LED screen here. 


    Viewfinder brightness

    Change the brightness of the EVF here. 


    Screen/Viewfinder color tone

    Make the screen and viewfinder color tone warmer or colder. 


    Fine-Tune VF color tone

    A perfect EVF color tone is important to many photographers. Besides the coarse adjustments made with the menu above, you can further tweak the EVF color tone here.


    Ui magnification

    You can magnify menu screens by double-tapping with two fingers. Double-tap again to restore the original display size.

    Magnification is also available on the Quick Control screen in viewfinder shooting, the Custom Quick Control screen, and the electronic level screen.


    Set Up Menu Page 4 (SET UP4)

    Set Up Menu Page 4


    HDMI resolution

    You can choose either Auto where the camera will decide automatically what type of device it’s connected too, 1080p or 4K.


    Touch control


    You can turn on or off the touch sensitive screen on the back of your Canon EOS R5. Standard/Sensitive/Disable.


    Multi function lock

    If you find yourself regularly changing settings on the camera accidentally while moving around, then making use of the multi-function lock can avoid issues when you come to shoot in a fast-paced environment. The lock switch below the quick command dial can be used to lock the main dial, the multi-controller or the quick control dial – simply select which you would like to lock through the custom function in Group 2 Disp./Operation. When you come to change a setting, you may see L displayed in the viewfinder and on the top LCD panel. If this happens, you will be unable to change the setting because the multi-function lock is set. Simply flick the switch and the camera will return to normal.


    Shutter at shutdown

    You can tell the EOS R5 to close the mechanical shutter when you turn off the camera. This to avoid getting dust on the sensor or protecting it. 


    Sensor cleaning

    You should set this to Auto cleaning. This will send a charge through your sensor every time you turn it off, dislodging any dust particles that might be on the sensor. You should also make a habit of regularly cleaning the señor cage with a simple air blower.

    If you prefer to only periodically clean the sensor, you can use the ‘clean now’ function to immediately do this procedure.


    Set Up Menu Page 5 (SET UP5)

    Set Up Menu Page 5


    Reset camera

    As a last resort in case of problems, you can fully reset the R5 to factory settings here.


    Custom Shooting Mode (C1-C3)

    You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s C1, C2, and C3 positions.

    Battery info

    You can check the remaining capacity, shutter count and recharge performance of your battery here. 


    Copyright information

    Insert your own copyright information here. This will be written to every image you take.


    Certification logo display

    You can find the url to the Canon software manual here. But mine is better…

    Certification Logo Display

    A bunch of certification logos. You officially have my permission to ignore this :).


    Firmware

    You can check the firmware revision number here. 


    Custom Function Menu


    C. Fn1: Exposure Settings

    Custom function menu page 1


    Exposure level increments


    Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop.

    ISO speed setting increments You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to 1-stop or 1/3 stop.

    Bracketing auto cancel ON: Enable When you set the power switch to 2, the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting. OFF: Disable The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.
    Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed from the starting point zero plus/minus 1.
    Number of bracketed shots The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.

    Safety shift OFF: Disable Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture. This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain a standard exposure. ISO: ISO speed. This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and aperture-priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.

    C. Fn2: Exposure Settings

    Custom function menu page 2


    Same exposure for new aperture If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO speed is set manually (other than Auto ISO or H (12800) is set), the maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a higher number (smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2. Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum aperture f/number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting as is, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3. OFF: Disable Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture already set will be used for shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the maximum aperture f/number increases, adjust the ISO speed and shutter speed before you shoot. ISO: ISO speed If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. Tv: Shutter speed If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.

    AE lock meter. mode after focus

    If you check “spot” metering for AE locked after focus, then I can lock the exposure when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus.  Then you can recompose the image using AE (perhaps evaluative) and Auto ISO.  The new compostion will now register new AE and Auto ISO.


    Restrict shooting modes

    If you find that you’re not using certain shooting modes, you can remove this from the menu here. 


    Set shutter speed range You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> <a> modes, you can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that you have set. In the <d> <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.
    • Highest speed: You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
    • Lowest speed: You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec

    Set aperture range

    You can set the aperture range. In the <f> <a> <F> modes, you can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have set. In the <d> <s> modes, the aperture will be set automatically within the aperture range that you have set.
    • Min. aperture (Max. f/): You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
    • Max. aperture (Min. f/): You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.

    C. Fn3:  Operation Settings

    Custom function menu page 3


    Dial direction during Tv/Av

    Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.

    Control ring rotation The control ring rotation function can also be reversed here.  

    Customize buttons Within the Customize buttons category, the EOS R5 lets users change the function of 14 different camera controls for still-image shooting; if the camera is set to a video recording mode, that drops to 12 different buttons.

    A few general points here, before we dive into the details. First, while the number of potential changes users can apply to most of the buttons are much more extensive than we’ve seen on previous Canon EOS DSLRs, each control has a specific, factory-set list of possible functions you can apply. And, these do vary in some cases, from one control to another. For instance, there are 25 possible choices to modify the rear AF point select button when you shoot still images, but 41 for the adjacent AE Lock button.

    Furthermore, it’s not possible (as of late 2018) to add or delete items from the factory-set customization list for each control — if a feature isn’t listed on the menu for customizing a particular button, it can’t be added to that button’s capabilities.

    Even with this, the list of possible changes is far more extensive than we’ve seen in previous Canon EOS DSLRs. To take just one example, the AF-ON button on the top-of-the-line EOS-1D X Mark II digital SLR camera gives the user 9 possible ways to customize it; the same AF-ON button on the EOS R5 provides 41 possible choices.

    And, the EOS R5’s customization changes, depending on if the camera is in a still-image shooting mode, or switched over to a video shooting mode. Set to video, you lose the ability to customize the function of the Movie Start button (on top of the camera, with the red dot icon), and the shutter button, via the Customize buttons menu. (However, in a video shooting mode, there are settings in the 4th Set-up Menu screen for Shutter Button function, allowing users to modify how it operates for a half-press and full press during video shooting.)

    And, in a video shooting mode, the possible functions you can apply to a particular button sometimes change from what’s available in a still-image shooting mode. This is absolutely normal, and not a sign of any malfunction.


    Customize dials Change the operation of the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and Control Ring on Canon’s RF lenses (and on the optional Control Ring Lens Mount Adapter EF-EOS R5)
    Clear customised settings Clear all your custom settings. 

    C. Fn4: Operation Settings

    Custom function menu page 4
    Add cropping information It is possible to capture a full frame but add in crop marks for various aspect ratios such as 6:6 or 4:5. In the DPP software this makes it very much quicker to achieve an image in the aspect ratio you require for your end usage. If you plan to make use of the cropping information setting in the Custom Functions, first ensure that the crop/aspect ratio setting in the red ‘Shoot4’ is set to FULL. If it is set to anything else, you will be unable to add cropping information through the custom function menu.
    Audio compression turn on audio compression here.
    Default erase option You can specify which options will be your default when erasing images. This way, you don’t have to go through the default process when selecting images for erasing. 
     Release shutter w/o lens You’ll be able to engage the shutter without the Canon EOS R5 detecting a lens. This is a handy option if you’re using third party manual lenses without electronic contacts. When using these lenses, the camera is unaware of the fact that a lens is connected, and the shutter would otherwise not work.
     Retract lens on power off If a powered zoom lens is attached to the EOS R5, setting this function to ON would cause the lens to retract when the camera is powered off.
    Add IPTC information If this function for adding IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information is equipped with the camera, you can edit and register IPTC information. IPTC information registered on the camera can be added to shot images. IPTC information is comment information, such as captions, credits, and shooting location.
    C. Fn5: Other Settings Custom function menu page 5
    Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)

    Clears all the user custom functions saved in the Custom functions Menu and resets them to the factory defaults. 


    My menu (green)

    MY MENU1

    EOS R5 my Menu

    My Menu allows you to build your own menus. You can add all your most used Menu functions to this page like Format for instance. Adding favourite functions to this menu means that you’ll be able to access them quicker than having to browse through the entire Menu system.

    Conclusion

    The EOS R5 is a fantastic mirrorless camera, and as you might have noticed there are many features hidden inside the Menu system. Even when coming from another Canon full frame camera the Canon EOS R5 is somewhat different because this is a mirrorless system with it’s own strengths and weaknesses.

    An EVF like this might take some time to get used too for instance, but the addition of features like Eye AF should make your job as a photographer easier on the other. A great way to get to know the Canon EOS R5 is to read this thorough menu run-through alongside your camera, set it up and do some testing of your own.

    If you have any questions, feel free to ask them in the comment section below. Happy shooting!

     

     

  • Nikon Z50 setup guide with tips and tricks

    Nikon Z50 setup guide with tips and tricks

    Introduction

    The Nikon Z50 camera is the first Nikon hybrid equipped with an APS-C sensor. In a compact form factor, the Z50 has the right to satisfy demanding photographers: 20.9MP APS-C DX sensor, 209-point autofocus, Expeed 6 processor, 100-51200 Iso sensitivity, and 4K video at 30i/s.

    If you’re looking for a setup guide for the Nikon Z6 or Z7 or Z5, please follow these links.

    These features will definitely make the Nikon Z50 a more useable camera in terms of speed and functionality compared to older models.  There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Nikon cameras. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.

    Full Menu Overview and explanation

    MENU → Playback Menu 

    Z50 playback menu

    Delete

    Here you can:

    • delete all pictures on the memory card
    • choose pictures to be deleted in a thumbnail preview
    • delete pictures by shooting date.

    Note the hints at the bottom of the monitor that tells you which keys have to be used.

    Hack: The main advantage of this menu is the option to delete by shooting date.

    Playback Folder

    If there are several folders on your memory card you can choose here from which folders images will be displayed in playback mode:

    • only from the one that is currently used for new pictures (as defined in the shooting menu Storage Folder)
    • from all folders, the Z50 has created (default)
    • from all folders on the memory card – possibly including pictures from other sources.

    Hack: Ignore. I would not exchange memory cards between cameras without formatting them to reduce the risk of write errors (=loss of pictures!).

    That makes the last option unattractive and I do not see practical use in using several Storage Folders and consequently the other two choices.

    Playback Display Options

    You can add Focus point info to the playback display here as well as add additional photo info like Exposure Info, Highlights, RGB Histogram, Shooting Data…

    Image Review

    If turn this on, each new image will appear automatically on the monitor just after shooting.

    Hack: I prefer to switch off this option because the regular flickering of the monitor is annoying if you leave the camera close to the eye.

    After Delete

    This menu defines which image will be displayed after you delete one:

    • Show next (default): The next newer one
    • Show previous: The next older one
    • Continue as before: The next picture will be displayed if you have scrolled forward before deleting the picture and the previous picture will be displayed if you have scrolled backward before.

    Hack: I prefer the last option because I delete images both while browsing forward or backward and then it is nice if the display adapts to the direction you are using.

    After Burst, Show

    After burst, show option in the playback menu controls whether the photo displayed at the end of a burst of shots is the first or last in the burst. It takes effect only when the Image review is off.

    Nikon Z50 burst shooting
    Rotate All

    If you switch on this option photos taken in upright format will be rotated during a preview.

    Slide Show

    View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder. Hidden images are not displayed.

    Options:

    • Start: Start slide show.
    • Image type: Choose the type of image displayed from Still images and movies, Still images only, and Movies only.
    • Frame interval: Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
    • Skip back/skip ahead: Press left to return to the previous frame, right to skip to next frame.
    • View additional photo info: Press up or down to change or hide photo info displayed (still images only).
    • Pause: Press OK to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight Restart and press OK.
    • Adjust volume: Press magnifier during movie playback to increase volume, mag+flash to decrease.
    • Exit to playback menu: Press Menu to end the slide show and return to the playback menu.
    • Exit to playback mode: Press Play to end the slide show and exit to playback mode.
    • Exit to shooting mode: Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting mode.
    Rating

    Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D. Rating is not available with protected images.

    Procedure:

      1. Select an image: Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail playback.
      2. Display playback options. Press the info button to display playback options.
      3. Select Rating: Highlight Rating and press right.
    1. Choose a rating. Press left or right to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select trash can to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion. Press OK to complete the operation.

    Hack: If Rating is selected for Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment) > Fn2 button, pictures can be rated by keeping the Fn2 button pressed and pressing left or right.

    MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 1

    photo shooting menu

    Reset Photo Shooting Menu

    This menu resets all entries in the shooting menu back to the default values defined by Nikon, the only exception is the entry Storage Folder.

    Hack: This menu may be useful if you are new to the Z50 and have played a lot with the settings in this menu.

    Storage Folder

    This menu defines the folder on the memory card in which new images are stored and allows to create new folders:

    • Select folder by number: You choose a three-digit number and the Z50 will create a folder with this number at the beginning of its name if it does not exist yet. The following five characters „Z50“ cannot be altered.
      When you see a folder symbol next to the selected number a folder exists already.
    • Select folder from the list: You choose a folder from a list of existing ones – without the possibility to create new ones.
    File Naming

    You can replace the three letters „DSC“ which are the default beginning of file names with your own individual combination.

    • an underscore _ before or after these three letters, depending on which color space you use.
    • a sequential four-digit number.
    Choose Image Area

    The Nikon Z50 offers a choice of the following image areas:

    • DX (24 × 16): Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
    • 1:1 (24×24): Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1:1
    • 16:9 (36×20): Pictures are recorded with a 16:9 image ratio.
    Image Quality

    The Nikon Z50 supports the following image quality options:

    • NEF (RAW): RAW data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
    • NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine/NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
    • NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal/NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
    • NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic/NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
    • JPEG fine/JPEG fine: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
    • JPEG normal/JPEG normal: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
    • JPEG basic/JPEG basic: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
    Image Size

    Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area.

    DX (24×16; DX format)
    • Large: 5568 x3712
    • Medium: 4176 x 2784
    • Small: 2784 x 1856
    1 : 1 (24×24)
    • Large: 3712 x 3712
    • Medium: 2784 x 2784
    • Small: 1856 x 1856
    16 : 9 (36×20)
    • Large: 4468 x 37128
    • Medium: 4176 x 2344
    • Small: 2784 x 1560
    NEF (RAW) Recording

    NEF (RAW) image files (extension “*.nef”) contain the raw image data output from the image sensor. Using Nikon’s ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D software, you can adjust and re-adjust settings such as exposure compensation and white balance as often as you please without degrading image quality, making this format ideal for photos that will be processed in multiple different ways. ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D are available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download Center.

    The process of converting NEF (RAW) images to other formats such as JPEG is referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. You can save NEF (RAW) images in other formats using the ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D computer applications or the NEF (RAW) processing option in the camera retouch menu.

    ISO sensitively settings

    If the Nikon Z50 decides that it can’t properly expose the image at that ISO given your current aperture and shutter speed, it automatically adjusts ISO as necessary. Turn on the Auto ISO Sensitivity option. The camera will now override your ISO choice when it thinks a proper exposure is not possible with the settings you’ve specified.

    If On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity when optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected for ISO sensitivity. The options listed below are available for fine-tuning auto ISO sensitivity control.

    • Maximum sensitivity: Choose an upper limit for ISO sensitivity to prevent it from being raised too high.
    • Maximum sensitivity with c: Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional flash unit.
    • Minimum shutter speed: Choose the shutter speed below which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent underexposure in modes P and A. Options range from 1/4000 s to 30 s.

    MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 2

    hoto Shooting Menu  page 2

    White Balance

    White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.

    Auto

    White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources. For best results, use type G, E , D or Z lens. If optional flash fires, results are adjusted appropriately. Color temperature can be viewed in the playback info display after shooting.

    Options:

    • Keep white (reduce warm colors; 3500–8000 K)
    • Normal (3500–8000 K)
    • Keep warm lighting colors(3500–8000 K)
    Natural light auto

    White balance is adjusted for natural light, producing colors closer to those seen by the naked eye. (4500–8000 K)

    Incandescent

    Use under incandescent lighting. (3000K)

    Fluorescent
    • Sodium-vapor lamps (2700 K): Sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports venues).
    • Warm-white fluorescent(3000 K): Warm-white fluorescent lights.
    • White fluorescent(3700 K): White fluorescent lights.
    • Cool-white fluorescent(4200 K): Cool-white fluorescent lights
    • Day white fluorescent(5000 K): Daylight white fluorescent lights.
    • Daylight fluorescent(6500 K): Daylight fluorescent lights.
    • High temp. mercury-vapor (7200 K): High color temperature light sources (e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
    Direct sunlight

    Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight. (5200K)

    Flash

    Use with optional flash units. (5400K)

    Cloudy

    Use in daylight under overcast skies. (6000 K)

    Shade

    Use in daylight with subjects in the shade. (8000 K)

    Choose color temp.

    Choose color temperature from list of values. (2500–10,000 K)

    Preset manual

    Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as reference for white balance.

    Set Picture Control

    Here you can change settings for the internal processing of picture data from the image sensor into final JPG files.

    It’s necessary to start with an existing configuration or set of settings that Nikon has predefined for a certain look of the final image. You can choose between:

    • Standard: Nikon‘s default for a neutral picture as the standard for most shooting situations.
    • Neutral: A processing with slightly less sharpening, contrast improvement, and saturation; for those who do these steps on their own later on.
    • Vivid: Higher color saturation, sharpening, and contrast.
    • Monochrome: Converts into black and white.
    • Portrait: Very similar to „neutral“, slightly less sharpening, contrast and color saturation than „standard“.
    • Landscape: Higher contrast than „standard“.

    You can modify any of these preset configurations by placing a yellow selection mark in it and use the selector to the right.

    The „Quick adjust“ increases or decreases all settings in the direction of the intended picture style and is available for all configurations except „neutral“.

    Alternatively, you can select and change all detail settings individually:

    • Sharpening: Increases contrasts at edges which improve the perceived sharpness.
    • Contrast: Increases or decreases the contrast between light and dark areas.
    • Brightness: Lightening or Darkening of the whole picture.
    • Saturation: Changes color saturation for more intense or fainter colors.
    • Hue: Changes the overall color tone in a slightly complicated manner.

    And also two which are available only for the configuration „monochrome“:

    • Filter effects: Simulates the effect of color filters as they are used in black and white photography to adjust contrast.
    • Toning: Allows you to choose another dominating color tone than black and white.

    Additionally, you can create your own configurations by copying, modifying and renaming an existing one.
    To do so you need the next menu option Manage Picture Control.

    When you change a configuration in the Picture Control and do a Reset
    your last chosen configuration will stay selected but any changes in it will be reset.

    Tips: An important menu with a visible impact on your photos! Only those who shoot in RAW format only and create JPG files on their own in the computer can ignore it.
    The „best“ settings are a matter of your personal preferences, in this menu, everyone has to find his or her best settings by experience.

    On the other hand, all of these settings can also be changed afterward in image processing on the computer, you really have to get them right in the camera if you want to have the best possible results straight out of your Nikon Z50.

    The configuration „neutral“ is very similar to „standard“ with slightly less contrast and saturation, the difference is really small.
    The sharpening chosen by Nikon is rather weak, I prefer a higher value of 5 or 6.
    When looking at your images in the proper magnification (100% zoom on the computer monitor) you will see clearer edges.
    „Vivid“ has visibly more intense color and more contrast. That can improve your image but also be too much of a good thing if you have already high contrast (e.g. direct sunlight) and make your picture look unnatural.
    I would not set contrast and brightness here and switch on the Active D-Lighting.
    Regarding the setting „hue“: Ignore this setting, it is only a slight shift in color for which I do not see any practical relevance.
    Result: All the above has brought me to the following settings that I use myself:

    One own configuration, created with the next menu option Manage Picture Control, called „standard+sharper“ which is a copy of the configuration „standard“ with sharpening increased to 6.
    Another configuration called „sharp+vivid“ which is the same as before plus a saturation increased by two steps.
    I use the first one most of the time and switch to the second one occasionally.
    Last but not least: Do not overestimate the importance of this menu, most important is still a good subject, light, exposure and
    white balance for cooler or warmer color rendition. After all that the „Picture Control“ is for the final touch.

    Manage Picture Control

    This menu allows you to copy existing Picture Control configurations (see the previous menu) and save them with personal adjustments under a new name.

    To create your own configuration choose the entry „Save/edit“, pick an existing configuration and press OK. Then you can assign one of nine places in the list of possible customized entries, edit it and choose your own name.

    you do not really need your own configuration and can ignore this menu. With the user settings also personal adjustments to a Picture Control will be saved.

    If you do change the Picture Control settings regularly it is best to put the most commonly used settings into your own configurations.

    Reset will put all Picture Control configurations back to their default settings and you need an own configuration if you do not want to tweak Picture Control each time with your setting details.

    • Save/edit: Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom Picture Controls.
    • Rename: Rename custom Picture Controls.
    • Delete: Delete custom Picture Controls.
    • Load/save: Use the following options to copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card. Once copied to the memory card, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software. (Copy to the camera, Delete from the card or Copy to the card.)
    Color Space

    You can either choose sRGB or Adobe RGB.

    • sRGB (default): This is the worldwide standard with 256 levels of brightness for each of the basic colors red, green, blue, for displaying images on computer monitors.
    • Adobe RGB: A color space developed by Adobe for a broader color range of printed images.

    As for sRGB, all colors will be stored with shares of red, green and blue with 256 levels of gradation, the difference is that the maximum saturations are higher.

    The color space is relevant only for the creation of JPG-files, not for the RAW format.

    Active D-Lighting

    „Active D-Lighting“ (ADL) is Nikon‘s name for an additional step in the internal image processing that mainly lightens dark areas of the picture.

    It is relevant only for JPG files, not for the RAW format.

    You can set this to Auto, Extra High, High, Normal, Low or Off.

    ADL can also darken too bright areas but lightening dark ones are more frequent and the improvements are more visible there.

    You can choose an automatic adjustment that the Nikon Z50 will set stronger or weaker depending on your subject‘s contrast or four steps from low to extra high.

    Hack: Turn this ON, set it to Normal, it really helps improve your images!

    Long Exposure NR

    If this menu option is switched on the Nikon Z50 will use an extra step in internal image processing for noise reduction if the exposure time is longer than 1 second.

    Hack: switch it Off, it’s better to use advanced image noise reduction on your Mac

    High ISO NR

    You can choose if an additional noise reduction shall be applied in the internal image processing for shots with high ISO sensitivity.

    Vignette Control

    Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E, D and F lenses (PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High, Normal, Low, and Off.

    Hack: Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette control does not apply to movies or multiple exposures.

    MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 3

    release mode

    Diffraction Compensation

    With digital cameras, if you select a small aperture to increase depth of field when shooting cityscapes or landscapes, it may cause a loss of sharpness across the image due to diffraction. .

    Thanks to the new and faster EXPEED 6 processor inside the Nikon Z50, there is a new diffraction compensation function. This helps capture landscapes and cityscapes crisply even when small apertures are used(from f/11 onwards).

    Auto Distortion Control

    Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase).

    Flicker Reduction Shooting

    Reduce banding or (in photos taken in continuous release modes) uneven exposure or coloration caused by the flicker of such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps during viewfinder photography.

    Hack: Take a test shot and view the results before taking additional photographs. Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved with dark backgrounds, bright light sources, or decorative lighting displays and another non-standard lighting. Depending on the light source, there may be a slight delay before the shutter is released. During burst shooting, the frame rate may slow or become erratic; in addition, the desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during shooting.

    Flicker detection will not take effect at shutter speeds slower than 1/100 s (including Bulb and Time) or when Mup is selected for release mode or exposure delay mode is on.

    Metering

    Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:

    1. Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, D or F lenses , distance information (3D color matrix metering III; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III, which does not include 3D distance information).
    2. Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b6, Center-weighted area, if non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is attached, area is equivalent to circle 12 mm in diameter). Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
    3. Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). The circle is centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will meter center focus point). Ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
    4. Highlight-weighted: Camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use to reduce the loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.

    Hack: Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu allows the camera to use color matrix metering when the matrix is selected and improves the accuracy of center-weighted and spot metering.

    Flash Control

    Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and adjust settings for off-camera flash photography.

    Flash Control Mode

    When an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 is mounted on the camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash settings can be adjusted using the Flash control > Flash control mode item in the photo shooting menu (in the case of the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with the flash used, while the options displayed under Flash control mode vary with the mode selected. Settings for other flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.

    • TTL: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300, flash compensation can be adjusted using the W (M) button.
    • Auto external flash: In this mode, the output is adjusted automatically according to the amount of light reflected by the subject; flash compensation is also available. Auto external flash supports “auto aperture” (qA) and “non-TTL auto” (A) modes; non-TTL auto is selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached without specifying the focal length and maximum aperture using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu. See the flash unit manual for details.
    • Distance-priority manual: Choose the distance to the subject; flash output will be adjusted automatically. Flash compensation is also available.
    • Manual: Choose the flash level manually.
    • Repeating flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level (Output), the maximum number of times the unit fires (Times), and the number of times the flash fires per second (Frequency, measured in Hertz). The options available for Times vary depending on the options selected for Output and Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
    Wireless Flash Options

    Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote flash units. This option is available only when an SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is mounted on the camera.

    • Optical AWL: The remote flash units are controlled using low-intensity flashes emitted by the master flash. Available only with an SB-5000 or SB-500 mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
    • Optical/radio AWL: This option is for flash photography using both optically- and radio-controlled flash units. Choose this option when using both a WR-R10 and an SB-500 mounted on the camera accessory shoe. Remote flash control is automatically set to Group flash.
    • Radio AWL: The remote flash units are controlled by radio signals emitted by a WR-R10 attached to the camera. Available only with the WR-R10 and remote flash units that support radio AWL.
    • Off: Remote flash photography disabled.
    Remote Flash Control

    Choose from the following remote flash photography options:

    • Group flash: hoose a separate flash control mode and flash level for each group of remote flash units. If Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options you can choose the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units.
    • Quick wireless control: Choose for control of the overall flash output. Use Quick wireless control options to adjust the balance between groups A and B and set the output for group C manually (the master flash does not fire). You can also adjust flash compensation for groups A and B and, if Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options  choose the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units
    • Remote repeating: The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level (Output), the maximum number of times the flash units fire (Times), the number of times the units fire per second (Frequency), and, if Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options, the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units. Note that the number of times the flash units fire in total may vary depending on the options selected for Output and Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
    Radio Remote Flash Info

    View the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL.

    Flash Mode

    Some of the flash modes are set on the camera, rather than on the flash. To set most of these modes on a Nikon Z50, you keep the flash button depressed and rotate the main (rear) command wheel to cycle through the modes. The modes appear in the flash frame in the top LCD panel on the camera.

    To set Auto FP on a Nikon Z50, you need to go into this menu.

    Fill Flash

    The flash fires with every shot. In modes P and A, the shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1/200 s (or 1/8000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and 1/60 s.

    Red-eye Reduction Mode

    When this mode is activated (showed by an eye-symbol appearing on both the camera’s top LCD and the flash’s rear LCD), the flash fires three flashes at reduced output just before the picture is taken. This makes the iris of humans and animals contract which reduces the area where the red-eye effect can be seen. It also introduces a shutter delay to allow the subject’s irises time to react.

    The red-effect only occurs when you use the flash as key light pointing forwards and directly into the subject’s eyes.

    Slow-sync Flash + red-eye

    As for Red-eye reduction except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in portraits. The use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.

    Slow-sync Flash

    The default shutter speed when using flash is 1/60 second (you can change this default on a Nikon Z50 with custom setting #24). The flash will use a faster shutter speed if the ambient light requires it, but will not normally go below 1/60 second in the modes where the camera controls the shutter speed.

    When slow-sync flash is activated (on a Z50, you set this by pressing the flash button and turning the main command wheel until the word “SLOW” appears on the camera’s top LCD), shutter speeds as low as 30 seconds may be used to obtain the correct exposure for both the main subject in the foreground lit by the flash, and the background, in low-light situations or at night.

    For slow shutter speeds, you may need to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.

    In the Night Portrait scene mode, slow-sync flash is automatically activated.

    Rear-curtain Sync

    Normally the flash fires at the same time the shutter curtain opens (i.e. front curtain sync). When the rear curtain is activated (indicated by the word “REAR” on the camera’s top LCD), the flash fires just before the shutter curtain closes.

    Rear-curtain sync may be selected when one is shooting fast-moving subjects at slow shutter speeds. With front curtain sync, unnatural-looking pictures can occur because the blurred movement appears to be in front of the subject frozen by the flash. Rear-curtain sync creates a picture in which the blur of a moving subject (for example, the taillights of a speeding car) appears behind the frozen subject.

    Rear-curtain sync automatically enables slow-sync mode, since the only time you should want to use rear sync, is when you also set slow shutter speed to capture blurred movement.

    Using rear curtain sync with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 second is not recommended. Rear-curtain sync introduces a delay between the pre-flash and the main flash lasting the length of the exposure. This delay gives most people just enough time to react to the pre-flash. Using rear sync for portraits is a sure way to make your subjects blink or squint.

    Rear-curtain sync can not be combined with AWL, or with the FP or RPT modes.

    Auto FP

    (Focal Plane) is a sync mode that lets you synchronize flash with higher shutter speeds than the camera’s normal maximum flash synchronization shutter speed (often called “x-sync speed”).

    To use this mode on a Nikon Z50, you need to have a CLS-compatible flash unit connected to the camera’s hot-shoe, and you must enable Auto FP on the camera. Without having Auto FP enabled, the camera will not let you set the shutter speed higher than the x-sync speed when you use a CLS-compatible flash. With Auto FP enabled, you can use any shutter speed.

    In FP mode the flash will not fire once, but many times at an extremely rapid rate (typically 50 kHz) which begins with the opening of front curtain of your camera’s focal plane shutter and ends with the closing of the rear curtain. This permits the correct exposure to be obtained as the traveling slit of a dual curtain shutter passes over the sensor at high-speed.

    Note that using FP reduces the maximum power of the flash. The only way to have FP is to illuminate the focal plane curtain, which, depending on the shutter speed, may cover a very large percentage of the focal plane. This means that the higher the shutter speed is above the shutter’s x-sync speed, the smaller the area of film that gets illuminated by each flash.

    The table below shows approximately how much the maximum power expressed as guide number GN is reduced when an SB-900 is used in FP mode on a Nikon Z50. It has full power (GN 34, ISO 100/meter) at the X-sync speed (1/200 second), is reduced by -1 EV (half power) at 1/250 second, and then by another -1 EV for each doubling of shutter speed. At 1/4000 second it is reduced by -5 EV, or 1/32 of full power.

    Shutter Speed GN Power
    1/200 34 0 EV 1/1
    1/250 22 -1 EV 1/2
    1/500 16 -2 EV 1/4
    1/1000 11 -3 EV 1/8
    1/2000 8 -4 EV 1/16
    1/4000 6 -5 EV 1/32

    Using FP will reduce the effective GN of the flash when you exceed the x-sync speed. However, it has no effect at speeds lower than the x-sync. It does no harm to have Auto FP permanently enabled.

    On a Nikon Speedlight, the FP mode can be activated in the following flash modes: TTL, TTL BL, AA, M, and GN. On the Nissin Di866, the FP mode only works in TTL mode.

    Note: The FP mode is mainly useful when you want to use large apertures when doing fill-flash in bright daylight. The FP mode does not help you freeze motion. Normal flash photography is very good at freezing motion since a burst of electronic flash is so incredibly brief. When the dominant light on a scene is a very short flash of light it is almost as if you used a very high shutter speed in the thousandths of a second. However, when you use FP mode flash, the flash unit pulses the light output over a longer period of time in order to simulate a light being lit for the entire time the shutter travels across the focal plane. Since the flash burst is no longer very short, it becomes more difficult to freeze motion, even with high shutter speeds. And because the FP mode makes you lose so much of the power of the flash, it is not very useful when you want the flash to be the dominant light. For high-speed flash photography, you instead use manual mode and adjust the power ratio to make sure that the flash burst is short enough to “freeze” movement.

    High-Speed Sync Without Auto FP mode

    The Nikon Z50 will sync with most flash units at any shutter speed (i.e. up to 1/4000 second). This is because these models use a CCD sensor that works as an electronic shutter at high shutter speed. A conventional mechanical shutter is only used at shutter speeds below 1/125 second.

    For some reason, Nikon has put in a program limitation that will not let you set faster shutter speed than 1/500 second in these models if you mount a  flash unit in the camera’s hot-shoe. You can get around this limitation by taping over the two metal contacts on the back of the Speedlight.

    Flash Compensation

    Flash compensation can be used to adjust the level of the master and remote flash units by from −3 to +1 EV in steps of 1/3 EV. To choose a value for flash compensation, press the magnifying button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel.

    When the master flash or a remote flash is set to TTL or Auto and flash compensation to a value other than ±0.0, an icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder and the current value for flash compensation can be viewed by pressing mag. Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.

    Release Mode

    Choose the operation performed when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.

    • Single frame: The Nikon Z50 takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
    • Continuous L: While the shutter-release button is held down, the camera records 1–4 frames per second. The frame rate can be chosen by rotating the sub-command dial when Continuous L is highlighted in the release-mode menu.
    • Continuous H: While the shutter-release button is held down, the camera records up to about 5 frames per second.
    • Continuous H (extended): While the shutter-release button is held down, the camera records up to about 11 frames per second. The built-in flash and optional flash units cannot be used. Flicker reduction has no effect.
    • Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer.
    The Shooting Display

    In continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed modes, the display is updated in real time even while shooting is in progress.

    Frame Advance Rate

    Frame advance rate varies with camera settings. The approximate maximum rates at different settings are given in the table below.

    Frame Advance rate

    Continuous H (Extended)

    Depending on camera settings, exposure may vary erratically during each burst. This can be prevented by locking exposure.

    The Memory Buffer

    The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. The approximate number of images that can be stored in the buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count displays while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

    While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove the battery until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.

    MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 4

    Z50 AF modes

    Focus Mode
    AF-S (single AF):

    Designed for shooting stationary subjects, this mode locks focus when you depress the shutter button halfway. (Think for still, stationary.) In AF-S mode, the camera insists on achieving focus before it releases the shutter.

    If this behavior annoys you, open the Custom Setting menu, choose Autofocus, and then choose AF-S Priority Selection. If you change the setting to Release, the picture is then recorded when you fully depress the shutter button even if focus isn’t yet achieved.

    AF-C (continuous AF):

    Geared to capturing moving targets, AF-C mode adjusts focus as needed as long as the shutter button is pressed halfway. (Think C for continuous motion.) Remember that a focus-adjustment occurs only if the subject moves closer to or farther from the camera.

    If the subject is moving but only shifts a short distance in a horizontal direction, no adjustment is needed because the focusing distance remains the same.

    AF-F

    The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.

    MF (Manual Focus)

    To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus.

    Hack: To decide which shutter-release option is right for you, consider whether you’d rather have any shot, even if it’s out of focus, or capture only those that are in focus. I prefer the latter, so I set both AF-S and AF-C modes to Focus. Why waste battery power, memory card space, and inevitable time deleting out-of-focus pictures? Yes, if you’re shooting rapid action, you may miss a few shots waiting for the focus to occur — but if they’re going to be lousy shots, who cares? Sports shooters who fire off hundreds of shots while covering an event, though, may want to unlock shutter release for both AF-C and AF-S modes. Again, you may wind up with lots of wasted shots, but you increase the odds that you’ll capture that split-second “highlight reel” moment.

    AF Area Mode

    Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.

    • Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
    • Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. the ability to limit point selection to every other point allows you to quickly use the joystick, or touchscreen, to position the AF point.
    • Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.

    • Wide-area AF (S) and (L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
    • Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi-selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.

    A word on Subject tracking:

    When Auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, pressing OK enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticule; position the reticule over the target and either press OK again or press the AF-ON button to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, the focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press OK a third time. To exit the subject-tracking mode, press the magnifier/question button.

    A word on Quick Focus-Point Selection:

    or quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can choose the Select center focus point for Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.

    The Touch Shutter: Touch controls can be used to focus and release the shutter. Touch the display to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter.

    touch shutter

    Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation performed by tapping the display in shooting mode. Choose from the following options:

    • Touch: Touch the display to position the focus point and focus (autofocus only; the touch shutter cannot be used to focus in manual focus mode). Focus locks while your finger remains on the display; lift your finger to release the shutter. Available only in photo mode.
    • Touch AF: As above, except that lifting your finger from the display does not release the shutter. If auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, the camera will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame; to switch to a different subject, tap it in the display.
    • Off: Touch shutter disabled.
    Optical VR

    Enable or disable de optical vibration reduction function of your lens, if the lens has this functionality.

    Auto Bracketing

    Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. The following options are available:

    • Auto bracketing set: Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect. Choose AE & flash bracketing to perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE bracketing to bracket only exposure, Flash bracketing to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB bracketing to perform white-balance bracketing, or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting.
    • Number of shots: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
    • Increment: Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot (ADL bracketing excluded).
    • Amount: Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot (ADL bracketing only).
    Multiple Exposure

    Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.

    Multiple exposure mode

    • On (series): Take a series of multiple exposures. Select Off to resume normal shooting.
    • On (single photo): Take one multiple exposure.
    • Off: Exit without creating additional multiple exposures.

    Number of shotsChoose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph.Overlay mode

    • Add: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not adjusted.
    • Average: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is divided by the total number of exposures taken (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
    • Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the brightest.
    HDR (High Dynamic Range)

    Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures.

    Interval Timer Shooting

    Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) when using the interval timer.

    • Start: Start interval timer shooting, either after 3 s (Now selected for Choose start day/time) or at a selected date and time (Choose day/time). Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
    • Choose start day/time: Choose a start option. To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time.
    • Interval: Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) between shots.
    • Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
    • Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
    • Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
    • Interval priority: Choose whether the camera gives priority to exposure time or interval timing in exposure modes P and A. Select On to ensure photos are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, be sure the Minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings  > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval. You should also focus using manual focus or, if you are using autofocus, choose Release for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection) according to whether AF-C or AF-S is selected.
    • Starting storage folder: Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: New folder: A new folder is created for each new sequence or Reset file numbering: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
    Time-Lapse Movie

    The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time-lapse movie.

    • Start: Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting time.
    • Interval: Choose the interval between shots in minutes and seconds.
    • Shooting time: Choose the shooting time (hours and minutes).
    • Exposure smoothing: Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
    • Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
    • Image area: Choose an image area for time-lapse recording. The options are those for the Image area item in the movie shooting menu.
    • Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie. The options are those for the Frame size/frame rate item in the movie shooting menu.
    • Interval priority: Choose whether the camera gives priority to exposure time or interval timing in exposure modes P and A. Select On to ensure frames are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that frames are correctly exposed. If On is selected, be sure the Minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval. You should also focus using manual focus or, if you are using autofocus, choose Release for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection,) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection) according to whether AF-C or AF-S is selected.

    MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 5

    Silent Photography

    Select On to reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when shooting landscapes and other static subjects. Use of a tripod is recommended. The flash and long exposure noise reduction are disabled, as are the electronic front-curtain shutter and beep speaker, regardless of the options selected for Custom Setting d5 (Shutter type) and for Beep options in the setup menu. In continuous release modes, the frame advance rate will change.

    Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates for continuous release modes and disables some features, including the flash, beep speaker, long exposure noise reduction, and the electronic front-curtain shutter.

    Although the noise of the mechanical shutter is muted, other sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or if the Menu or Play button is pressed when an option other than Off is selected for Vibration reduction. During silent photography, flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in the final picture under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.

    MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 1

    Movie shooting menu

    Reset Movie Shooting Menu

    In case of trouble or unexpected behaviour, highlight Yes and press OK to restore movie shooting menu options to their default values.

    File Naming

    Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC”.

    Frame Size/Frame Rate

    Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate.

    4K UHD (max 29 minutes 59 seconds recording time)
    • 2160 30p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p  144 Mbps
    • 2160 25p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 25p 144 Mbps
    • 2160 24p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 24p 144 Mbps
    HD (max 29 minutes 59 seconds recording time)
    • 1080 120p: 1920 x 1080 120p; 144 Mbps
    • 1080 100p: 1920 x 1080 100p; 144 Mbps
    • 1080 60p: 1920 x 1080 60p; 56 Mbps
    • 1080 50p: 1920 x 1080 50p; 56 Mbps
    •  1080 25p: 1920 x 1080 25p; 28 Mbps
    •  1080 24p: 1920 x 1080 24p; 28 Mbps
    Slow-Mo (max 3 minute recording time)
    • 1080 30p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 30p x 4 (slow-mo) 36 Mbps
    • 1080 25p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 25p x 4 (slow-mo) 36 Mbps
    • 1080 24p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 24p x 5 (slow-mo) 29 Mbps
    Movie Quality

    You can choose from High quality and Normal.

    Movie File Type

    Choose the file format for movies from MOV and MP4.

    Hack: MP4 is superior!

    ISO Sensitivity Settings

    You can adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings:

    • Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in exposure modes P, S, and Aand when On is selected for Auto ISO control (mode M) in exposure mode M.
    • Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On for auto ISO sensitivity control in exposure mode M, Off to use the value selected for ISO sensitivity (mode M).
    • ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO sensitivity for exposure mode M from values between ISO 64 and Hi 2. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in other exposure modes.

    Hack: At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This can be prevented by choosing a lower value for the ISO Maximum sensitivity.

    White Balance

    Choose the white balance for movies (same choices as for the Photo Settings)

    Set Picture Control

    Choose a Picture Control for movies. You’ll also find the Creative Picture Control settings here. You can find presets like Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Sober, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary and Carbon. These can off course be edited too

    MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 2

    manage picture control

    Manage Picture Control

    You can create custom Picture Controls here. (again same procedure as for photos)

    Active D-Lighting

    Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating movies with natural contrast. Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.

    Options are Auto, Extra High, High, Normal, Low or Off.

    High ISO NR

    Reduce “noise” (what Nikon calls randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities

    Vignette Control

    reduce shading or lens vignetting automatically using this function.

    Diffraction Compensation

    Same as for stills, the Nikon Z50 can automatically reduce the loss of sharpness due to diffraction when lenses are used with an aperture above f/11.

    Auto Distortion Control

    Automatically corrects for peripheral distortion (requires a lens with a CPU chip with distortion control support.)

    Flicker Reduction

    Reduce flicker and banding when shooting movies under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting. Choose Auto to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.

    If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number). To prevent flicker, select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.

    Metering

    Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The same options as in the Photo Menu are available.

    • Matrix metering: The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
    • Center-weighted metering: The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
    • Spot metering: The camera meters a ⌀4 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
    • Highlight-weighted metering: The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.

    MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 3

    release mode

    Release Mode

    Choose the operation performed when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.

    For action shooting (cat, runner): Continuous.

    Other Modes: Single frame.

    Focus Mode
    • AF-S: For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
    • AF-C: For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
    • AF-F: The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
    • Manual focus: The shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus.
    AF-Area Mode

    AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus.

    • Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
    • Single-point AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. Use with stationary subjects.
    • Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
    • Wide-area AF (S or L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
    • Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.

    Hack: For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can choose Select center focus point for Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.

    Subject Tracking: When Auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, pressing OK enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticule; position the reticule over the target and either press OK again or press the AF-ON button to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press J a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the mag/question button.

    Optical VR

    Identical to the Photo Menu again. Only needed when your lens does not have a VR switch. If your lens does have a VR switch, turning it of will turn off both lens and sensor stabilisation.

    Electronic VR

    Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie mode.

    Microphone Sensitivity

    Turn the built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.

    Attenuator

    Select Enable to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording movies in loud environments.

    Frequency Response

    If S Wide range is selected, the built-in and external microphones will respond to a wide range of frequencies, from music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose T Vocal range to bring out human voices.

    MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 4

    Movie Shooting Menu page 4

    Wind Noise Reduction

    Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are unaffected), reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.

    MENU → Custom Setting Menu → page 1

    Custom Setting Menu Page 1

    Reset Custom Settings

    Resets all Custom settings to the factory settings.

    Autofocus Settings
    a1 AF-C Priority Selection

    When AF-C is selected for photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).

    • Release: Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
    • Focus: Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus.

    Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released.

    a2 Auto-area AF face/Eye detection

    When photographing portrait subjectswith Auto-area AF, use Custom Setting a2 (Auto-area AF face/eye detection) to choose whether the camera detects both faces and eyes (face/eye-detection AF) or only faces (face-detection AF). If Face and eye detection on is selected and a portrait subject is detected, an amber border indicating the focus point will appear around the subject’s face or, if the camera detects the subject’s eyes, one or the other of their eyes (face/eye-detection AF).

    Faces detected when Face detection on is selected are similarly indicated by an amber border. If AF-S is selected for focus mode, or if the camera is shooting using AF-S when AF-A is selected for focus mode, the focus point will turn green when the camera focuses.

    If more than one portrait subject or more than one eye is detected, left arrow and right arrow icons will appear on the focus point, and you will be able to position the focus point over a different face or eye by pressing LEFT or RIGHT cursor. If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion. During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus by pressing OK.

    Eye detection is not available in movie mode!

    a3 Focus points used

    For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a3 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change).

    a4 AF activation

    Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus (Shutter/AF-ON) or if focus can only be adjusted using the AF-ON button or other controls to which AF-ON has been assigned (AF-ON only).

    a5 Focus Points wrap-around

    Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the viewfinder to another

    • Wrap: Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right, so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted (1) selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display (2):Z50 Fd Af Area Select
    • No wrap: The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
    a6 Focus Point options

    Choose from the following focus point display options.

    a7 Low Light AF

    Autofocus is achievable with the Nikon Z50 down to -4EV provided low-light autofocus is activated. only works in Single AF!!!

    Choose On for more accurate focus under low-light conditions when AF-S is selected for focus mode, but note that camera may require more time to focus. This option takes effect only in photo mode when a setting other than Auto is chosen with the mode dial. While low-light AF is in effect, “Low-light” will appear in the display and the display refresh rate may drop.

    Hack: This slows down autofocus for general photography, so it should be disabled except for focussing in really low light.

    a8 Built-In AF-Assist Illuminator
    Metering/Exposure Settings
    b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl

    Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing.

    b2 Easy exposure compensation

    This option controls whether the plus/minus button is needed to set exposure compensation. If On (Auto reset) or On is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash even when exposure compensation is set to ±0.

    • On (Auto reset): Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials (see note below). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires (exposure compensation settings selected using the E button are not reset).
    • On: As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
    • Off: Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main command dial.
    b3 Center-weighted area

    Choose the size of the area given the most weight in center-weighted metering. If a non-CPU lens is attached, the size of the area is fixed at 12 mm.

    Remember that the exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure fine-tuning is in effect. The only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu.

    b4 Fine-Tune optimal exposure

    Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.

    Timers/AE Lock Settings
    c1 Shutter-release button AE-L

    Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed.

    • On (half press): Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks exposure.
    • On (burst mode): Exposure only locks while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
    • Off: Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock exposure.
    c2 Self-timer

    Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.

    • Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
    • Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
    • Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when the Number of shots is more than 1.
    c3 Power off delay

    Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed during playback (Playback; defaults to 10 seconds) and image review (Image review; defaults to 4 seconds), when menus (Menus; defaults to 1 minute) or information (Information display; defaults to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie recording (Live view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.

    Shooting/display Settings
    d1 CL mode shooting speed

    Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode.

    d2 Max. continuous release

    he maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 200. Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.

    Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2, shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills.

    d3 Exposure delay mode

    In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the shutter is engaged.

    d4 Limit selectable image area

    Choose the options available when image-area selection is assigned to the i menu or to the command dials and a camera control. Highlight the desired options and press the right arrow to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.

    d5 Limit selectable image area

    DX: (24×16)

    1:1: (16×16)

    16:9 (24×14

    d6 File number sequence

    When a picture is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.

    • On: When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
    • Off: File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created automatically if a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures.
    • Reset: Same as for On, except that the next picture taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
    d7 Apply settings to live view

    Choose On to preview how changes to such settings as white balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation affect color and brightness in photo mode, or select Off to adjust brightness and hue for ease of viewing (regardless of the option selected, the effects of the aforementioned settings are always visible in movie mode).

    d8 Framing grid display

    Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when composing photos.

    d9 Peaking highlights

    When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. Choose the peaking level and outline color.

    • Peaking level: Choose from 3 (high sensitivity), 2 (standard), 1 (low sensitivity), and Off; the higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
    • Peaking highlight color: Choose the highlight color.
    d10 View all in continuous mode

    Choose whether image review is available during burst shooting. If Off is selected, not only the monitor but also the monitor backlight will turn off during exposures.

    Bracketing/Flash Settings
    e1 Flash Sync Speed

    This option controls flash sync speed.

    • 1/250 s (Auto FP): Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached. If other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s. If the flash unit supports auto FP high-speed sync, shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s can be selected by the camera (modes P and A) or by the user (modes S and M).
    • 1/250 s–1/60 s: Flash sync speed set to selected value.

    Hack: Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit: To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 sec ort longer). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel together with the flash sync speed.

    Hack: Auto FP High-Speed Sync: Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when auto FP high-speed sync is active.

    e2 Flash Shutter Speed

    Choose the slowest shutter speed available when front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in mode P or A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).

    e3 Exposure comp. for flash

    Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.

    • Entire frame: Both flash level and exposure compensation are adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame.
    • Background only: Exposure compensation applies to background only.
    e4 Auto ISO sensitivity control (with flash)

    Choose the reference used to set exposure when a flash is used with auto ISO sensitivity control.

    • Subject and background: The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity.
    • Subject only: ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed.
    e5 Bracketing order

    At the default setting of MTR > under > over, exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the following order: the unmodified shot is taken first, followed by the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the highest value. If Under > MTR > over (plus to minus) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.

    Controls Settings
    f1 Customize i menu

    Customise the appearance of the i Menu. What’s included and what not.

    Split-Screen Display Zoom: When assigned to the i menu, Split-screen display zoom can be used to split the display into two boxes showing separate areas of the frame side-by-side at a high zoom ratio. The positions of the magnified areas are shown in the navigation window, making it easier to check focus at two different locations when photographing a building or other wide object situated at right angles to the camera.

    f2 Custom control assignment

    Choose the functions assigned to camera controls, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials.

    f3 Custom controls (playback)

    AE-L/AF-L button and OK button.

    f4 Customize command dials

    This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command dials.

    • Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected operations. Highlight options and press right to select or deselect, and then press OK to save changes and exit.
    • Change main/sub: Choose the roles played by the command dials for exposure and focus operations.

      • Exposure setting: If On is selected, the main command dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture in mode A only.
      • Autofocus setting: This option applies to the control assigned Focus mode/AF-area mode using Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment). If On is selected, the focus mode can be chosen by keeping the control pressed and rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the main command dial.
    • Menus and playback: Select Off to use the multi selector for menus and playback. If On or On (image review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback and to highlight thumbnails and menu items. The sub-command dial is used in full-frame playback to skip forward or back according to the option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in thumbnail playback to page up or down. While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu for the highlighted option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review.
    • Sub-dial frame advance: When On or On (image review excluded) is selected for Menus and playback, the sub-command dial can be rotated during full-frame playback to select a folder, to skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time, or to skip to the next or previous protected picture, the next or previous photo, the next or previous movie, or the next or previous picture with a selected rating (to choose the rating, highlight Rating and press right).
    f5 Release Button to use dial

    Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This setting applies to the plus/minus, ISO, and timer buttons and also to controls to which the following roles have been assigned using Custom Settings f2 or g2 (Custom control assignment): Choose image area, Image quality/size, White balance, Set Picture Control, Active D-Lighting, Metering, Flash mode/compensation, Focus mode/AF-area mode, Auto bracketing, Multiple exposure, HDR (high dynamic range), Exposure delay mode, Shutter spd & aperture lock, Peaking highlights, Choose non-CPU lens number, and Microphone sensitivity.

    f6 Reverse indicators

    If minus plus bar is selected, the exposure indicators in the control panel, viewfinder, and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right. Selectplus minus bar to display positive values on the left and negative values on the right.

    Movie Settings
    g1  Customize i Menu

    Choose the functions assigned to camera controls, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials, when you press i.

    g2 Custom controls

    Assign the custom controls for operation when in movie mode. Power aperture is available only in modes A and M. The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.

    g3 AF Speed

    Change the speed of the autofocus for movie mode. o choose when the selected option applies, highlight When to apply and press right. Choose from Always (the selected option applies whenever the camera is in movie mode) and Only while recording (the selected option applies only while recording is in progress; at other times, the focus speed is “+5”, or in other words as fast possible).

    g4 AF tracking sensitivity

    Choose how quickly focus responds when your subject leaves the focus point or something passes between the subject and the camera in movie mode. Choose from values between 7 (Low) and 1 (High). The higher the value, the slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject when something passes between the subject and the camera. The lower the value, the quicker the camera is to respond to the subject leaving the focus area by shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.

    g5 Highlight display

    Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of the frame) and select the level of brightness needed to trigger the highlight display.

    • Display pattern: To enable the highlight display, select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2.
    • Highlight display threshold: Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If 255 is selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.

    MENU → Setup Menu → page 1

    format memory card

    Format Memory Card

    To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select Yes. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required.

    Save User Settings

    Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1, U2, and U3 positions on the mode dial.

    Follow the steps below to save settings:

      1. Select a mode.

        Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode.

      1. Adjust settings.

        Choose a focus point and make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P), shutter speed (modes S and M), exposure and flash compensation, aperture (modes A and M), and settings in the photo shooting, movie shooting, and Custom Settings menus.

      1. Select Save user settings.

        Highlight Save user settings in the setup menu and press 2.

      1. Select a position.

        Highlight Save to U1, Save to U2, or Save to U3 and press 2.

    1. Save user settings.

      Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2 to the mode dial position selected in Step 4.

    Reset User Settings

    Reset settings for U1, U2, and U3 to default values.

    Language

    Choose a language for camera menus and messages.

    Time Zone And Date

    Change time zones, set the camera clock, synchronize the clock with the clock on a smart device, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.

    • Time zone: Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
    • Date and time: Set the camera clock.
    • Date format: Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
    • Daylight saving time: Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.
    Monitor Brightness

    Press the up or down arrow to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.

    Note that monitor brightness can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Adjust viewfinder brightness. If Auto is selected, viewfinder brightness will be adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions; to adjust brightness manually, select Manual and press up or down (choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness). Note that viewfinder brightness can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the active display; it cannot be adjusted when the viewfinder is off or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.

    Viewfinder Color Balance

    Use the multi selector to adjust viewfinder color balance as described in Monitor Color Balance.

    MENU → Setup Menu → page 2

    information display

    Information Display

    If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the information display will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background. To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color.

    AF fine-tune

    Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. Use only as required; AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus. Auto fine-tuning is available in live view. We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you use frequently; if you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.

    AF fine-tune (On/Off): Choose On to turn AF tuning on, Off to turn it off.

    Saved value: Tune AF for the current lens. Press 1 to move focal point away from camera or 3 to move focal point toward camera; choose from values between +20 and –20. The camera can store values for up to 30 lens types. Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.

    Default: Choose the AF tuning value used when no previously saved value exists for the current lens.

    List saved values: List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and press the trash icon. A menu will be displayed; press up or down to choose an identifier and press OK to save changes and exit.

    Image Dust Off ref Photo

    This setting requires reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D online help). Image Dust Off cannot be used with small or medium-sized NEF (RAW) images.

    A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended when recording Image Dust Off reference data. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.

    Choose a start option.

    Highlight one of the following options and press J. To exit without acquiring image dust off data, press G.

    • Start: A message will be displayed.
    • Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting. A message will be displayed when cleaning is complete.

    Acquire dust off reference data.

    Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.

    If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and a message will be displayed. Choose another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1.

    Image Comment

    Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D. The comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display. The following options are available:

    • Input comment: Input a comment as described in “Text Entry”. Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
    • Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press OK to exit.
    Copyright Information

    Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D. The following options are available:

      • Artist: Enter a photographer name as described in “Text Entry”. Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
      • Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described in “Text Entry”. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long.
      • Attach copyright information: Select this option to attach copyright information to all subsequent photographs. Attach copyright information can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
    Beep Options

    Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when:

    • The self-timer is in operation
    • Time-lapse recording ends
    • The camera focuses in photo mode (AF-S selected for focus mode; Focus selected for Custom Setting a2, AF-S priority selection; and Off selected for Silent photography)
    • The touch screen is used for keyboard entry

    The Beep options menu contains the following items:

    • Beep on/off: Turn the beep speaker on or off, or select Off (touch controls only) to disable the beep during keyboard entry while enabling it for other purposes.
    • Volume: Adjust beep volume.
    • Pitch: Choose the pitch of the beep from High and Low.
    Touch Controls

    Adjust monitor touch control settings.

    • Enable/Disable Touch Controls: Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen controls, or Playback only to enable touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
    • Full-Frame Playback Flicks: Choose the gesture used to display the next image in full-frame playback: a flick from right to left or a flick from left to right.
    Self-portrait Mode

    Self-portrait mode is selected automatically when the monitor is in the self-portrait position.

    • In self-portrait mode, exposure compensation and self-timer settings can be adjusted using touch controls.
    • Tap the self-timer icon to choose the shutter-release delay and the number of pictures taken.
    • Tap the exposure compensation icon to adjust exposure.
    • Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. Press it the rest of the way down to take photographs.
    • You can also focus and take photographs using touch controls.
    • In movie mode, movies can be recorded using the movie-record button.
    • To exit self-portrait mode, rotate the monitor out of the self-portrait position.

    MENU → Setup Menu → page 3

    HDMI settings

    HDMI

    Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices. The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders. Some recorders will even start and stop recording in response to camera controls. Use the HDMI option in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.

    • Output Resolution: Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select the appropriate format.
    • Advanced: Adjust the settings below.

      • Output range: Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose Limited range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to 235 or Full range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255. Choose Limited range if you notice a loss of detail in shadows, Full range if shadows are “washed out” or too bright.
      • External recording control: Enabling external recording control allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol (Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders). An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor: A is displayed in movie live view, while B is displayed during movie recording. During recording, check the recorder and recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the device (note that the footage output to the device may be disrupted while external recording control is in effect). The camera display will turn off automatically when the standby timer expires, ending HDMI output; when recording movies to an external device, select Standby timer for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) and choose No limit or a time longer than the anticipated recording time. See the manual provided with the recorder for more information on device features and operation.
      • Output data depth: Choose from 8 bit and 10 bit.
      • N-Log setting: Select On (cannot record to card) to preserve details in highlights and shadows and avoid over-saturated colors when recording movies. Choose this option (available only when 10 bit is selected for Output data depth) when recording footage that will later be color-corrected. The footage will be recorded directly to the external device and cannot be saved to the camera memory card. The ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum sensitivity and ISO sensitivity (Mode M) options in the movie shooting menu can be set to values of from ISO 1600 to 25600 and ISO 800 to 25600, respectively.
      • View assist: Choose On for a live preview of video footage recorded with On (cannot record to card) selected for N-Log setting. The colors in the preview will differ from those of the final movie, but this has no effect on the footage actually recorded.

    HDMI Output:

    HDMI output is not available at movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-mo or when the camera is connected to a device running SnapBridge or Camera Control Pro 2.

    10-Bit Output Data Depth:

    10 bit can be used only with compatible recorders. Regardless of the display mode selected, the camera monitor will turn on and the viewfinder will remain blank. No photos can be taken; during movie recording, the following additional restrictions apply when 3840 × 2160 is selected for frame size:

    • Movies are not recorded to memory cards inserted in the camera.
    • Icons and characters in the monitor will display at low resolution.
    • Selecting the DX image area reduces the angle of view to about 90%.

    Zoom

    Movies filmed at a frame size of 3840 × 2160 are displayed at a size of 1920 × 1080 when zoomed in.

    Location Data display

    Adjust settings for use when the camera is connected to a device that provides location data, namely a GPS receiver or a smart device running the SnapBridge app (for more information on SnapBridge, see the app’s online help).

    • Standby timer: If Enable is selected when a GPS receiver is connected, the exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby timer, reducing the drain on the battery.
    • Position: View the location data supplied by the GPS receiver or smart device (the items displayed vary with the source).
    • Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
    Airplane Mode

    Select Enable to disable the wireless features of Eye-Fi cards and Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections to smart devices. Connections to other devices using a wireless transmitter can only be disabled by removing the transmitter from the camera.

    Connect To Smart Device

    Adjust settings for connection to smart devices.

    • Start: Follow on-screen instructions to connect to the smart device.
    • Password protection: Choose a password for smart device connections and turn password protection on or off.

    Use SnapBridge to control the camera remotely from a smart device and download pictures from the camera. SnapBridge is available free-of-charge from the Apple App Store and on Google Play.

    Connect To PC

    If On is selected, new photos will automatically be uploaded to the PC.

    Connecting via USB:

    If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized.

    Installing ViewNX-i:

    Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation (existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may not support the camera). An Internet connection is required. For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon website for your region.

    Copying Pictures to the Computer

    Connect the USB cable.

    After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable.

    Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.

    To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.

    Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.

    Turn the camera on.

    The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2).

    Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options

    Adjust settings for optional WR-R10 wireless remote controllers and for optional radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting.

    LED Lamp:

    Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller.

    Link Mode:

    Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same mode is selected for the other devices.

    Pairing: To pair the camera with a WR-R10, mount the WR-R10 on the camera and press the pairing button.

    PIN: Connect using a four-digit PIN code. Press 4 or 2to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change, then press J to enter and display the selected PIN.

    Regardless of the option selected for Link mode, signals from paired wireless remote controllers will always be received by the WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote controller will need to select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.

    Assign remote (WR) Fn Button

    Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless remote controllers.

    Conformity Marking

    View a selection of the standards with which the camera complies.

    Energy saving

    turn on the energy saving function.

    MENU → Setup Menu → page 4

    firmware version

    Slot Empty Release Lock

    Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.

    Reset All Settings

    Reset all settings except Language and Time zone and date to their default values. Copyright information and other user-generated entries are also reset. We recommend that you save settings using the Save/load settings option in the setup menu before performing a reset.

    Firmware Version

    View the current camera firmware version of your Nikon Z50 and attached lens.

    MENU → Retouch Menu → page 1

    quick retouch

    NEF (RAW) Processing

    Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs. If you displayed the retouch menu by pressing the G button, you can use this option to copy multiple images.

      1. Select NEF (RAW) processing.

        Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch menu and press 2.

      1. Choose how images are selected.

        Choose from the following options:

        • Select image(s): Select one or more images manually.
        • Select date: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images taken on selected dates.
        • Select all images: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images on the memory card (proceed to Step 4).
      1. Select photographs.

        If you chose Select image(s) in Step 2, a picture selection dialog will be displayed listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. Highlight images using the multi selector and press the W (Q) button to select or deselect; selected images are indicated by a Licon. To view the highlighted image full screen, press and hold the X button. Press J to proceed to Step 4 when your selection is complete.

        If you chose Select date in Step 2, a list of dates will be displayed. Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to select all NEF (RAW) pictures taken on the chosen dates and proceed to Step 4.

      1. Choose settings for the JPEG copies.

        Adjust the settings listed below, or select Original to use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken (the original settings are listed below the preview). Note that exposure compensation can only be set to values between −2 and +2 EV.

        1 Image quality
        2 Image size
        3 White balance
        4 Exposure compensation
        5 Set Picture Control
        6 High ISO NR
        7 Color space
        8 Vignette control
        9 Active D-Lighting
        10 Diffraction compensation
    1. Copy the photographs.

      Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph (if multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos). To exit without copying the photographs, press the Gbutton.

    Trim

    Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.

    Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.

    To reduce size of the crop: Press mag/question button.

    To increase size of the crop: Press magnifier.

    To change the crop aspect ratio: Rotate the main command dial.

    To position the crop: Use the multi selector. Keep the multi selector pressed to move the crop rapidly to the desired position.

    To create a cropped copy: Press OK to save the current crop as a separate file. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display.

    Resize

    Create small copies of selected photographs.

      1. Select Resize.

        Highlight Resize in the N tab and press 2.

        2. Choose a size.

        Highlight Choose size and press 2.

        Highlight the desired size and press J.

      1. Choose pictures.

        Highlight Select image(s) and press 2.

        Highlight pictures and press W (Q) to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button). Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete. Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4 (30×24), 1 : 1 (24×24), or 16 : 9 (36×20) cannot be resized.

    1. Save the resized copies.

      A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yesand press J to save the resized copies.

    D-Lighting

    D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photos.

    D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.

    Press left or right to choose the amount of correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.

    Quick retouch

    Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects.

    Red-Eye Correction

    This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and press OK to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.

    Straighten

    Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press OK to save the retouched copy.

    Distortion Control

    Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select Manual to reduce distortion manually. Note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see “Auto Distortion Control”. Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy. Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than DX (24×16).

    MENU → Retouch Menu → page 2

    Retouch Menu Page 2

    Perspective Control

    Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can be previewed in the edit display. Press OK to save the retouched copy.

    Image Overlay

    Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size. To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW) and an image size of Large (the overlay will be saved as a large NEF/RAW image even if Small or Medium is selected).

      1. Select Image overlay.

        Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press 2. Image overlay options will be displayed, with Image 1highlighted; press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only large NEF (RAW) images created with this camera (small and medium NEF/RAW images cannot be selected).

      1. Select the first image.

        Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the mag button. Press OK to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.

      1. Select the second image.

        The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press OK, then select the second photo as described in Step 2.

      1. Adjust gain.

        Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.

      1. Preview the overlay.

        To preview the composition, press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview column, then press up or down to highlight Overlay and press OK (note that colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press mag/question button.

    1. Save the overlay.

      Press OK while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame.

    Trim Movie

    Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed.

    Choose Start/End Point

    Follow the steps below to create trimmed copies of movies.

      1. Display a movie full frame.

      1. Pause the movie on the new opening frame.

        Play the movie back as described in “Viewing Movies”, pressing OK to start and resume playback and down to pause, and pressing left or right or rotating the main or sub-command dial to locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame.

        Movie progress bar

      1. Select Choose start/end point.

        Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight Choose start/end point and press OK.

      1. Select Start point.

        To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight Start point and press OK. The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.

        Start point

      1. Confirm the new start point.

        If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial; to skip to the first or last frame, rotate the sub-command dial).

      1. Choose the end point.

        Press the center of the sub-selector to switch from the start point (w) to the end point (x) selection tool and then select the closing frame as described in Step 5. The frames after the selected frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.

        Sub-selector

        End point

      1. Create the copy.

        Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.

      1. Preview the movie.

        To preview the copy, highlight Preview and press OK (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). To abandon the current copy and select a new start point or end point as described above, highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.

    1. Save the copy.

      Highlight Save as new file and press J to save the copy to a new file. To replace the original movie file with the edited copy, highlight Overwrite existing file and press OK.

    Trim Movie

    Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed.

    MENU → My Menu

    My Menu

    he MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu.

    Add Items

    Add items to My Menu

    Rewove Items

    Remove Items from my menu.

    Rank Items

    change the ranking of your added items.

    Choose Tab

    Choose a tab for your added item.

    The i Menu

    I Menu

    The most used functions in the main Menu can also be easily accessed by pressing the “I” on the back plate of the camera. This will bring you too the i Menu. This menu is completely customisable for both Photo and Movie mode (Controls Settings f1 – Customize i menu). We’ll have a quick look at the functionality added to this Menu as factory settings.

    Here you can change settings for the internal processing of picture data from the image sensor into final JPG files.

    It’s necessary to start with an existing configuration or set of settings that Nikon has predefined for a certain look of the final image. You can choose between:

    • Auto: Your Nikon Z50 automatically detects the type of scene.
    • Standard: Nikon‘s default for a neutral picture as the standard for most shooting situations.
    • Neutral: A processing with slightly less sharpening, contrast improvement and saturation; for those who do these steps on their own later on.
    • Vivid: Higher color saturation, sharpening and contrast.
    • Monochrome: Converts into black and white.
    • Portrait: Very similar to „neutral“, slightly less sharpening, contrast and color saturation than „standard“.
    • Landscape: Higher contrast than „standard“.

    You can also choose between a range of picture presets like Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Sober, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary and Carbon.

    Image Quality
    • NEF (RAW): RAW data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
    • NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine/NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
    • NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal/NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
    • NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic/NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
    • JPEG fine/JPEG fine: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
    • JPEG normal/JPEG normal: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
    • JPEG basic/JPEG basic: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
    • TIFF (RGB): Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety of imaging applications.

    Nikon Z6, wedding shoot, Cappadocia, Turkey, Wim Arys photography
    Wedding shoot in Cappadocia, Turkey.

    Flash Control

    Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and adjust settings for off-camera flash photography. See the flash control settings in the menu for more info.

    WiFi connection

    Turn On/Off the WiFi connection.

    Release Mode
    • Single frame: The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
    • Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d1 (CL mode shooting speed)
    • Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate given in “Power Source and Frame Rate” Use for active subjects.
    • Continuous high speed plus: only with jpeg.
    • Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer.
    AF Area Mode

    Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.

    • Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
    • Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. the ability to limit point selection to every other point allows you to quickly use the joystick, or touchscreen, to position the AF point.
    • Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
    • Wide-area AF (S) and (L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
    • Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking  can be activated by pressing the OK button.
    Image Size

    Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area.

    White Balance

    White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.

    Metering

    Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:

    • Matrix metering: The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
    • Center-weighted metering: The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
    • Spot metering: The camera meters a ⌀4 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
    • Highlight-weighted metering: The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
    Face Tracking

    Turn on face tracking, or automatic face detection and autofocus tracking.

    Vibration Reduction

    The Nikon Z50 is equipped with in-camera vibration reduction (VR), other manufacturers call this sensor stabilisation. The VR unit provides compensation for movement along five axes. The effects of vibration reduction are equivalent to a shutter speed up to approximately 5.0 stops. This function can also be used effectively with NIKKOR F lenses, including those not equipped with a VR function, with the Mount Adapter FTZ . ).

    There is an ON (normal) and SPT (Sport) preset.

    Focus Mode
    1. AF-S: For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
    2. AF-C: For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
    3. AF-F: The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
    4. Manual focus: The shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus.

    Quick how-to Nikon Z50 settings

    How to set-up back button focussing

    Back button focussing is a focussing and composition method where you disconnect the autofocus engine from the standard shutter button half-press. This enables you to engage the autofocus system only with the AF-ON button on the backplate.

    Z6 AF-ON button

    Now your autofocus and shutter are disconnected, enabling you to acquire autofocus independently from the shutter button action. This method is often used to recompose your shot after autofocus is acquired, the so-called focus and recompose method.

    This is very easy the set up with the Nikon Z50:

    Z6 back button focus setup

    Go to a7 in the autofocus menu and set AF activation to AF-ON only. This way, only the AF ON button will engage the autofocus engine.
    set AF activation to AF-ON

    Conclusion

    There is always a learning curve with every new camera you purchase. Luckily, Nikon decided to keep the hierarchy and the logic of their DSLR series cameras in the new Nikon Z50. This makes art easier to navigate at least for photographers experienced with those cameras. The Nikon Z50 is fairly new so I’ll add more tips and tricks to this post as I get more and more familiar with it. If you have any comments or questions, or just want to write about your experience with the Z50,  feel free to post them in the comment section below.

  • Sony a9II: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony a9II: settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    The Sony A9II is their latest full-frame mirrorless body and should beat many high-end DSLR’s in terms of speed and image quality. There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to the previous Sony sports-oriented mirrorless, you can find the original Sony A9 guide here.

    Sony A9II camera Menu system walkthrough

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 (Quality settings and image size settings page 1)

    Quality and image size settings page 1

    File Format:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A9II pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, the resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:

    • Long Exposure NR
    • Bulb
    • Cont. Shooting (including continuous shooting in Superior Auto)
    • Silent Shooting
    RAW File type

    You can choose between compressed and uncompressed RAW files here. The compressed option is lossy, meaning that some data is actually lost. The difference between compressed and uncompressed RAW files is actually notricable in some cases, but you might want to opt for the smaller files if you shoot lots of RAW at sporting events.

    JPEG Quality

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    JPEG Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:

    • L: 24M
    • M: 12M
    • S: 6M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3:

    • L: 16M
    • M: 8M
    • S: 4M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 20M
    • M: 10M
    • S:5.1M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 1:1:

    • L: 12M
    • M: 6M
    • S: 3M
    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3, 16:9 (crop but a more broad view) or 1:1 for Instagram. Leave as is at 2;3, you can always crop your pictures later when you shoot RAW. 

    APS-C/ Super 35mm

    Choose whether the camera will automatically switch to APS-C or Super 35mm when an APS-C lens is attached or not.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2 (Quality settings and image size settings page 2)

    Quality settings and image size settings page 2

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has a rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you risk getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.
    Lens Comp

    The Sony A9II allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance. 

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 3 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 1)

    Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 1

    Self-timer type

    You can choose between shooting a single image with the self-timer or a designated number of images.

    • Self-timer (single: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also, sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Interval Shoot Func.

    You can automatically shoot a series of still images for a time-lapse with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in advance. You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge.

    MR: Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    MR: Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the camera. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    Select Media

    Selects which of the two SD cards will be used to store your personal custom MR settings.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2)

    Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2

    Reg. custom shoot set

    You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

    You can save the following settings:

    • Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
    • Aperture
    • Shutter Speed
    • Drive Mode
    • Exposure compensation
    • ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
    • Metering Mode
    • Focus Mode
    • Focus Area
    • AF On
    Setup process
    1. MENU –  Camera Settings 1 – Reg Cust Shoot Set – Select a registration number from Recall Custom hold 1 to Recall Custom hold 3.
    2. Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.
    3. Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel and press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
    4. Select Register.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 5 (Autofocus settings page 1)

    Autofocus settings page 1

    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: the camera decides for itself which setting is appropriate.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion. Balanced works great for any type of photography.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
    Focus area

    The Sony A9  has an advanced autofocus system with 693 phase detection autofocus points on the sensor. These PDAF points cover 93% of the frame too. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A9 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
    • Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A9 will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the Sony A9 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot. If you’re coming from a DSLR, try to use this setting. This has been upgraded in version 5 firmware.
    Focus Settings

    Focus setting allows you to use the wheel, joystick or touch screen to move your focus point to any of the 693 on sensor phase detection points.

    Focus Are Limit

    It’s now possible to limit the choice of focus areas you have to cycle through to find the one you want. For instance, many photographers tend to use the Expand Flexible Spot in preference to the Small, Medium and Large Flexible Spots and the Center Area. You can now easily select and deselect these here.

    Switch V/H AF Area

    This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

    Off: disable this feature

    AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A9 will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

    AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A9 will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6 (Autofocus settings page 2)

    Autofocus settings page 2

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A9II to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Face/Eye AF Set.

    This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus with priority on human faces or eyes.

    Eye AF Settings:
    • Face Priority in AFSets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes Eye AF when autofocus is activated. (On or Off)
    • Subject detection: either human or animal for animal eye AF
    • Right/Left Eye Select: Specifies the eye to be detected. If Right Eye or Left Eye is selected, only the selected eye is detected.  Auto : The camera detects eyes automatically. Right Eye : The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected. Left Eye : The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    • Face Detect. Frame Disp.:Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when Face Priority in AF is set to On. (On or Off)
    • Animal Eye Display: this will show a square around the eye of the animal , indicating focus.
    Eye AF by custom key

    The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning Eye AF to a custom key. The camera can focus on human eyes as long as you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen regardless of the setting for Focus Area.
    For instance, if Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot and you want the camera to focus on an eye outside of the focusing frame, you can apply the Eye AF function by pressing the custom key to which Eye AF has been assigned, without changing Focus Area.

    Switch Right/Left Eye by custom key

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Right Eye or Left Eye, you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Auto, you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to automatic eye detection.

    Aperture drive in AF

    Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence. Sony designed this primary to give AF-C in continues drive at sports shootings with apertures beyond f11 when the old FW stopped down to the set aperture and the PDAF was not usable and the CDAF took over. Only currently works with the Sony 400mm GM lens.

    Standard: Uses the standard aperture drive system.

    Focus Priority: Changes the aperture drive system to prioritise auto-focusing performance. During continuous shooting using the electronic shutter, the Focus Priority]setting allows you to continuously adjust the focus with an F-value greater than F11.

    Silent Priority :Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in Standard.

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    Pre-AF

    Pre-AF by default was normally set to OFF on previous models. This can be a useful feature when taking selfies but can cause issues in Continuous AF (AF-C) with an AF Tracking Area selected. The camera is likely to latch on to a subject before you have identified which subject you would like to track. I recommend switching this to OFF if you are more interesting in shooting action/sports rather than selfies.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 (Autofocus settings page 3)

    Autofocus settings page 3

    Eye-Start AF:

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Area Regist.

    Another feature inherited from Canon. By registering an AF area/point, you have a quick way to move between points without having the thumb-stick of scroll across the AF field. For example, a bird photographer can set his Sony A9 up so they can quickly switch from a spot AF point for precisely focusing on a static subject, to a wide AF pattern for quickly acquiring and tracking a bird in flight.

    Del. Reg. AF Area

    Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.

    Focus frame Color

    It’s now finally possible to change the color of the focus frame on the screen and the EVF.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Disp. cont. AF Area

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 8 (Autofocus settings page 4)

    Autofocus settings page 4

    Phase Detect. Area

    Sets whether or not to display the auto-focus points for Phase Detection AF.

    Circ. of Focus Point

    This is a firmware version 5 feature that when turned ON allows the photographer to move a spot or Zone AF point over the edge of the frame and have it reappear on the other side of the screen.

    AF Micro Adj.

    Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses with an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 (Exposure settings page 1)

    Exposure settings page 1

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    Reset EV Comp

    Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.

    ISO Setting

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-6400 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 6400. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A9II reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the Sony A9 will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to [ocus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Face priority in Multi

    When turned on, this setting will give priority to detected faces in regards to the light metering of the camera. Turn On for perfectly exposed faces in your image. This will override the other selected metering mode.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    • Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
    • Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10 (Exposure settings page 2)

    Exposure settings page 2

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The Sony A9 II keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 (Flash settings)

    Flash settings

    Flash Mode:

    (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button)

    If you have purchased a flash for your A9, it’s important to learn about the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the camera will decide when and how you need the flash.

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells theSony A9 to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if you want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.

    Notes on using te Sony A9 II with an off-camera flash system like Godox or Flashpoint:

    • For basic operation, set the Sony A9 to ‘ambient’ flash.
    • Turn OFF Live-view display (MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7).
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Wireless Flash

    In case you’re wondering, this only works with Sony flashes that have wireless capabilities for controlling other units. If you’re using Godox flashes, you should simply set the Flash Mode to Fill Flash.

    If you’re indeed using Sony flash, there are two methods for wireless flash shooting:

    • light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the camera as a signal light
    • radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication.

    To perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

    Red Eye Reduction

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12 (Color, White Balance and Image processing settings page 1)

    Color, White Balance and Image processing settings page 1

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the Sony A9 Mark 2 tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    • Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The Sony A9 automatically adjusts the color tones.
    • Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
    • White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid color to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to your RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to color.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

    This functionality can be changed:

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A9, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Shutter AWB lock

    When in continuous shooting mode, the camera will lock the auto white balance with the first picture taken. All sequential shots after that (while holding the shutter button down) will be recorded with the same white balance.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13 (Focus assist settings)

    Focus assist settings

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A9II to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

    Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

    Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking Setting
    Peaking Level

    Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your Sony A9II set to MF or DMF.

    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 14 (Face registration and shoot assist settings)

    Face registration and shoot assist settings

    Anti-flicker shoot

    Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to moments when flickering will have less of an impact.

    This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – Camera Settings 1 – Face Registration – New Registration
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select Enter.
    Regist. Faces Priority

    Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using Face Registration when Face Priority in AF]is set to On.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1 (Movie settings page 1)

    Movie settings page 1

    Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    S&Q Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S H or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    Record Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p or 25p 100M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 30p or 25p 60M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 24p 100M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
    • 24p 60M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 60p 25M/50p 25M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 30p 16M25p 16M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 24p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    • 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A9II:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/S&Q Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned Record Setting and  the Frame Rate.

    Proxy Recording
    This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

    MENU –Purple Camera Icon– page 2 (Movie settings page 2)

    Movie settings page 2

    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

    Sets the initial magnification scale for  the Focus Magnifier functionality in the movie shooting mode. You can choose between 1 or 4 times magnification to check focus.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    MENU -Purple Camera Icon- page 3 (Movie settings page 3)

    Movie settings page 3

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.

    During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

    Audio Out timing

    You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

    • Live (default setting): Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
    • Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. (Off or On)
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. (Off, 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.66:1, 1.85:1, 2.35:1)
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. (Off, 80%, 90%)
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Video Light Mode

    Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

    • Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
    • REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
    • REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
    • Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 4 (Movie settings page 4)

    Movie settings page 4

    Movie w/ shutter

    Start recording movies when to shutter is pressed instead of the movie button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 6 (Zoom settings)

    Shutter and SteadyShot settings

    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom function on or off.

    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

    Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio.

    The camera will save this image as a jpeg and not a RAW file. With most Sony cameras, I’m not a big fan of clear image zoom, as the loss in quality and potential loss in post processing leeway (it’s not RAW after all) is significant. But because the A9 jpeg engine is soo good (it’s a camera connected for sports and journalism where there is less time to edit pictures) I would not hesitate using it with the ILCE-9.

    Zoom ring rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 7 (Display and Auto Review settings page 1)

    Display and Auto review Settings page 1

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Finder Frame Rate

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    • 120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
    • 60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
    Zebra setting

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping.

    You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.

    The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.

    I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 8 (Display and Auto Review settings page 2)

    Display and Auto Review settings page 2

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Shoot. Start Disp.

    Sets whether to let the screen blackout when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.

    Shoot. Timing Disp.

    Sets if and what kind of visual markers you’ll see when shooting in silent mode.

    • On: Type1: makes a solid square in the center AF point light up when the shutter is engaged.
    • On: Type2: makes the outlines of a square center AF point light up when the shutter is engaged.
    • On: Type3: you’ll see the brackets in far corners light up when the shutter is engaged.
    • On: Type4: Blue squares will light up in the center when the shutter is engaged.
    • Off: turns this effect off.
    Cont. Shoot. Lenght

    This will show you how many shots you have left on your SD card on screen. You can select to always have this info displayed, only during shooting or turn it off.

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 9 (Custom operation settings page 1)

    Custom operation settings page 1

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key Shoot.]and Custom Key PB.

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3

    In the Custom Key menu, I have assigned the AEL button to cycle between the 6 remaining AF area. I typically start wide and only come down in size if I am trying to avoid picking up subjects that are nearer to the camera than my primary subject. Some will start with an Expand Flexible Spot but you have to be quick at moving the Spot onto a moving target to start the tracking in order to be successful.

    Prior to the new AF Tracking, I would normally recommend people to use a Wide or Zone AF area and only use Lock-on AF Areas when obstacles might appear in front of the subject. Now I will be recommending ‘Tracking’ as the default AF Area for shooting action/sports.

    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    My Dial Settings

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial Setup

    You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 10 (Custom operation settings page 2)

    Custom operation settings page 2

    Av/Tv Rotate

    Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.

    Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

    You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    Function Ring  (Lens)

    Change the assigned function of the lens ring.

    Func. of Touch Oper.

    Select the functionality of the touch screen. There are two choices:

    1. Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
    2. Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.
    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the Movie button.

    Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

    Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to “Movie/S&Q Motion” mode.

    Lock Operation Parts

    You can set whether the dials and wheels will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 11 (Custom operation settings page 3)

    Custom operation settings page 3

    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the A9 produces a sound or not in silent mode with the electronic shutter.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 1 (Network settings page 1)

    Network settings page 1

    Send To Smartphone

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A9II or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A9II screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the Sony A9II using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    FTP Transfer Func.
    You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. 
    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your Sony A9II through your home wireless network.

    Ctrl w/ smartphone

    By connecting the Sony A9 to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

    Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the Sony A9 to a smartphone.

    PC Remote (Wired LAN)

    YYou can remotely control the camera with a high degree of freedom suited to professional sites via the PC app “Remote Camera Tool”. You can also remotely control an Ethernet connected camera or multiple cameras from this application. In addition, remote control is possible even during FTP transfer, which achieves even higher shooting efficiency.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 2 (Wireless settings page 2)

    Wireless settings page 2

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A9M2.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony A9 II shares the connection information for Send to Smartphone and Connection Info with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    Bluetooth Settings.

    Controls the settings for connecting the Sony A9 to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Location Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony A9 Mark 2, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    1. Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the Sony A9and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
    2. On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
    3. On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
    4. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    5. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    6. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    7. On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

    (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A9 II using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Bluetooth remote control

    There is now a bluetooth remote available for the Sony mirrorless cameras. Turn this functionality on or off here.

    Wired LAN setting

    You can set your IP Adress to either Auto or manual.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 2 (Wireless settings page 3)

    Wireless settings page 3

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A9 II is yours in particular situations.

    Imp Root Certificate

    Import a root certificate from your memory card here.

    Security(IPsec)

    Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) is a secure network protocol suite that authenticates and encrypts the packets of data sent over an Internet Protocol network.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1 (Playback settings page 1)

    Playback settings page 1

    Protect

    Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

    Rating

    Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key)

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 2)

    Playback settings page 2

    Voice Memo

    One of the new features on the Sony A9 Mark 2, it’s now possible to record and attach a voice memo to specfic image files. Records only when the center button is pushed.

    Voice Memo PB Volume Photo Capture

    Change the volume of the voice memo recording.

    Copy

    Copy an image or several images from one SD card slot to another.

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Initial Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Position

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the Sony A9 to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Init. Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    MENU – playback options – page 3 (Playback settings page 3)

    playback menu page 3

    Enlarge Initial Pos.

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    View Mode

    Select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display as group

    When shooting bursts of images in Continuous Shooting it is possible during playback to see the groups of images rather than all images. When cycling through the groups you can see individual images in that group by pressing the Center Button in the Control Wheel.

    MENU – playback options – page 4 (Playback settings page 4)

    Display Rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Image Jump Setting

    Image Jump Settings allows you to choose which images you choose to see when reviewing them in Playback, e.g., you can choose only to see your rated images. This will be useful to implement when you want to show somebody just your hero images from the day’s shoot.

    You can see all images by using the dial you have NOT assigned to see only the rated images.

    MENU – Setup – page 1 (Setup menu Page 1)

    Setup menu Page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Delete confirm.

    You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Pwr Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    MENU – Setup – page 2 (Setup Menu page 2)

    Setup menu Page 2Auto Pwr OFF Temp. 

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A9 turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A9 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.”

    • Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A9 has not been used for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    Touch Panel/pad

    Selects whether to activate touch panel operation when shooting with the monitor, or touch pad operation when shooting with the viewfinder.

    • Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    Touch Pad Settings

    Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    • Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.

    MENU – Setup – page 3 (Setup Menu page 3)

    Setup menu Page 3Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A6400 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    Remote CTRL

    You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    • Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the Sony A9 memory card.
    • HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A9 to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer

    MENU – Setup – page 4 (Setup Menu page 4)

    setup menu page 4

    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A9 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A9 Mark 2 for the first time.

    Area Setting

    Sets where in the world where you are using your Sony A9 II.

    IPTC

    You can write IPTC information when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the dedicated software and write the information to a memory card beforehand.

    IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

    MENU – Setup – page 5 (Setup Menu page 5)

    Setup menu Page 5

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Write Serial Number

    Writes the camera’s serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A9 for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    Rec. Media Settings

    Selects the memory card slot on which to record. Slot 1 is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1. To record the same image to two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/movie), use Recording Mode.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where (to what folder) the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    MENU – Setup – page 6 (Setup Menu page 6)

    Setup menu Page 6File/folder settings

    All settings for file and folder naming, sequence, etc.

    File settings

    All settings for file setrtings for movies.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your Sony A9 and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    MENU – Setup – page 7 (Setup Menu page 7)

    setup page 7

    Save/Load Settings

    Save or load settings from an SD Card.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony A9 II to factory settings.

    MENU – My menu setting

    Sony A9 star icon page 1
    Add Item

    You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.

    Sort Item

    This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

    Delete Item

    Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

    Delete Page

    Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

    Delete All

    Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

    General setup tips and reader questions answered

    Memory card issues

    Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:

    • Unable to magnify images on the card.
    • Buffer related problems.
    • Inability to read the memory card.
    • SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.

    Make sure you:

    • Format the memory card once you’ve inserted in the camera.
    • If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of the Sony A9II FR and Buffer.
    • If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
    • An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for best performance in burst mode.
    • Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.

    Conclusion

    Here it is, the advanced manual for the Sony A9II with plenty of tips and tricks to get you started. If you’re somewhat overwhelmed by this large post, I would suggest that you use the search function in a browser like Chrome at first to find the subject you are actually looking for.

    If you have any questions or need extra information on any subject covered here, feel free to write something in the comments section below. Have Fun!

  • Sony A6100: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A6100: settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    Like other Sony APS-C, cameras,  the Sony a6100 boasts a 24MP APS-C sensor, BIONZ X image processor, and 425-point hybrid autofocus system with 84% frame coverage. It, too, can shoot at up to 11fps with focus tracking, features a 3-inch flip-up touchscreen LCD, oversampled 4K video recording with full-pixel readout, and Sony’s Real-Time Tracking autofocus system is included as well.

    If you’re looking for an advanced guide for the Sony A6100 with tips and tricks to improve your understanding of this little wonder, you’ve come to the right place. I believe that the best way to learn all the features and functions is to have a good look at the menu system and gradually try to understand how everything works. This might take some time if you’ve never owned a Sony mirrorless, and even if you have, the menus have changed it this product. You can bookmark this page and simply refer back to it or continue reading whenever you feel like it.

    If you are looking for an A6000A6300 A6400, A6500, A6600 guide,  you can find them by clicking on the camera name.

    So take your ILCE-A6100, press the Menu button and follow along.

    Sony A6100 camera Menu system walkthrough

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 (Quality settings and image size settings page 1)

    Quality and Image Size settings page 1

    File Format:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A6100 pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, the resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:

    • Long Exposure NR
    • Bulb
    • Cont. Shooting (including continuous shooting in Superior Auto)
    • Silent Shooting
    JPEG Quality

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    JPEG Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:

    • L: 24M
    • M: 12M
    • S: 6M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 20M
    • M: 10M
    • S:5.1M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 16M
    • M: 8M
    • S: 4M
    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 16:9 (crop but a more broad view) or 1:1 for Instagram. Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later when you shoot RAW.

    Panorama Size:

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony A6100 to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the Sony A6100 to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2 (Quality settings and image size settings page 2)

    Quality and Image Size settings page 2

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp

    The Sony A6100 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance. 

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 3 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 1)

    Shoot mode and Drive settings page 1

    Auto Mode

    Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones that can be selected individually in SCENE mode. The Sony A6100 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though). Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button. Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting. Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6100 (you can’t change the range).

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing. This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image. You can either choose whether you want the Sony A6100 to save all images captured or just the composite image, by selecting S. Auto Img. Extract in the MENU system. Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only useable for jpeg shooting.

    Scene Selection

    It allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. (like when setting the mode dial to SCN)

    Menu item details
    • Portrait: Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
    • Sports Action: Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Macro: Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
    • Landscape: Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
    • Sunset: Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
    • Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
    • Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
    Superior Auto Img Extract

    When in Superior Auto, the Sony A6100 takes multiple images and combines them into one (jpeg only). You can either save all images captured (OFF) or only the combined image (ON). Turn it OFF; I’ve tried this functionality, and the combined image feature does not work well.

    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing. Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterward, to name just one example.

    You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

    • Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds has elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
    • WB Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. It also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket Order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    interval shoot Func.

    The Interval Shooting Function is a built-in Intervalometer that can be setup up to take images at regular intervals. Using Sony’s ‘Imaging Edge’ edit application these still images can be used to create a Time-Lapse movie. On the second page of options, you will see that there is an option for Silent Shooting which will save the wear and tear on your camera when shooting thousands of images. If you would prefer the camera to make a movie so that you don’t have to process the files you can use the new S&Q feature.

    Menu item details

    Interval Shooting: Sets whether to perform interval shooting. (On or Off)

    • Shooting Start Time: Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds)
    • Shooting Interval: Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second to 60 seconds)
    • Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
    • AE Tracking Sensitivity: Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select Low, exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. (High, Mid or Low)
    • Silent Shoot. in Interval: Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. (On or Off)
    • Shoot Interval Priority: Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is Program Auto or Aperture Priority and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for Shooting Interval.(On or Off)

    A little bit of background: The A6100 was the last A6000 series camera that used the ‘PlayMemories Apps’. These Apps could be purchased from Sony to add specialized functions to the camera. One of the most useful of these was the TimeLapse App. Sony has added this functionality to the A6100 via the new Interval Shooting Function.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2)

    Shoot mode and Drive settings page 2

    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A6100. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 5 (Autofocus settings page 1)

    Autofocus settings page 1

    Focus Mode:

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony A6100 will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard-setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The Sony A6100 will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The Sony A6100 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    You can see a focus indicator on-screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in focus and the focus is locked.

    Tip: if autofocus doesn’t seem to be working, check the lens barrel to see if the AF/MF slider is set to AF. It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for greater flexibility in composition.

    Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.

    Focus area

    The Sony A6100 has a dual-phase/contrast on-sensor autofocus system This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered on your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A6100 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject-centered.
    • Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to the desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A6100 will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible Spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Tracking: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor at Tracking on the Focus Area setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or expand flexible spot. Accurate tracking can also make a difference when you lock onto a specific part of your subject.

    Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot, Expand Flexible Spot or Zone by touching the screen.

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A6100 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Face/Eye AF Set.

    This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus on priority on human faces or eyes.

    Eye AF Settings:
    • Face-Priority in AFSets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes Eye AF when autofocus is activated. (On or Off)
    • Subject detection: either human or animal for animal eye AF
    • Right/Left Eye Select: Specifies the eye to be detected. If the Right Eye or Left Eye is selected, only the selected eye is detected.  Auto: The camera detects eyes automatically. Right Eye: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected. Left Eye: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    • Face Detect. Frame Disp.: Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when Face Priority in AF is set to On. (On or Off)
    • Animal Eye Display: this will show a square around the eye of the animal, indicating focus.
    Eye AF by custom key

    The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning Eye AF to a custom key. The camera can focus on human eyes as long as you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen regardless of the setting for Focus Area.
    For instance, if Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot and you want the camera to focus on an eye outside of the focusing frame, you can apply the Eye AF function by pressing the custom key to which Eye AF has been assigned, without changing Focus Area.

    Switch Right/Left Eye by custom key

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Right Eye or Left Eye, you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Auto, you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    The temporary left/right selection is canceled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to automatic eye detection.

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    Pre-AF

    Pre-AF by default was normally set to OFF on previous models. This can be a useful feature when taking selfies but can cause issues in Continuous AF (AF-C) with an AF Tracking Area selected. The camera is likely to latch on to a subject before you have identified which subject you would like to track. I recommend switching this to OFF if you are more interested in shooting action/sports rather than selfies.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6 (Autofocus settings page 2)

    Autofocus settings page 2

    Eye-Start AF:

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Disp. cont. AF Area:

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when the Focus Area is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    AF Micro Adj.

    It allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 (Exposure settings)

    Exposure settings

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Metering Mode

    This feature appeared in the A6100 and allows the user to take a spot meter reading from the position of the Spot AF point. If you change the setting to Focus Point Link you will also need to set the metering Mode and the AF Area to Spot.

    Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A6100 reads the light and sets the exposure. In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera. In spot or center, the Sony A6100 only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or  Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to Focus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Face-Priority in Multi…

    Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when Metering Mode is set to Multi.

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The Sony A6100 keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 8 (Flash settings)

    Flash settings

    Flash Mode:

    If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony A6100 to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick. What the slow sync flash mode does is the first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if you want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set:

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function (+-5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Wireless Flash:

    There are two methods for wireless flash shooting:

    1. light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the camera as a signal light,
    2. radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
    Red-Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 (Color, White Balance, and Image processing settings page 1)

    Color, white balance and image processing settings

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.

    Ambiance: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.

    White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid color to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to your RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to color.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambiance.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
    • You can edit these different styles and save your creative style if you want.
    • This functionality can be changed:
    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference between light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A6100, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image that retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: It creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10(Focus Assist settings)

    focus assist settings

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A6100 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

    Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

    Press the shutter button down to shoot.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking
    Peaking Level

    Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your Sony A6100 set to MF or DMF.

    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white, blue and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 (Face Detection and shoot assist settings)

    Shooting Assist settings

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – Camera Settings 1 – Face Registration – New Registration
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select Enter.
    Regist. Faces Priority

    Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using Face Registration when Face Priority in AF]is set to On.

    Smile Shutter

    Great for selfies as the camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony 6100 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Self-portrait/ -timer

    As you probably know, you can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.

    Simple turn this setting on, flip the screen and press the shutter button. The camera will start shooting after three seconds.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1 (Movie settings page 1)

    Sony A6100 movie settings page 1

    Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    S&Q Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S H or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    Record-Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of the recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p or 25p 100M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 30p or 25p 60M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 24p 100M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
    • 24p 60M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 60p 25M/50p 25M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 30p 16M25p 16M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 24p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    • 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow-motion movie on the Sony A6100:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/S&Q Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record-Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned Record-Setting and the Frame Rate.

    Proxy Recording
    This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

    MENU –Purple Camera Icon– page 2 (Movie settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 2

    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

    Sets the initial magnification scale for the Focus Magnifier functionality in the movie shooting mode. You can choose between 1 or 4 times magnification to check focus.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    MENU -Purple Camera Icon- page 3 (Movie settings page 3)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 2

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.

    During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. (Off or On)
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. (Off, 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.61:1, 1.85:1, 2.35:1)
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. (Off, 80%, 90%)
    • Guide frame: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Movie w/ shutter

    You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the Movie button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 4 (Shutter and Steadyshot settings)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 4

    Silent Shooting

    You can shoot images without the shutter sound, i.e. only using the electronic shutter.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to Off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Release without lens

    It makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the Sony A6100. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (digital) function. For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 5 (zoom settings)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 5

    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom functionality on or off.

    Zoom setting

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens. Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image).

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the Sony A6100 are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the Sony A6100 uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    Zoom ring rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 6 (Display and Auto Review settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 6

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Finder Frame Rate

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    • 120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
    • 60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
    Zebra setting

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping.

    You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.

    The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded in the resulting image.

    I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 7 (Display and Auto Review settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 7

    Live View Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 8 (Custom operation settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 8

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key Shoot.]and Custom Key PB.

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3

    In the Custom Key menu, I have assigned the AEL button to cycle between the 6 remaining AF area. I typically start wide and only come down in size if I am trying to avoid picking up subjects that are nearer to the camera than my primary subject. Some will start with an Expand Flexible Spot but you have to be quick at moving the Spot onto a moving target to start the tracking to be successful.

    Before the new AF Tracking, I would normally recommend people to use a Wide or Zone AF area and only use Lock-on AF Areas when obstacles might appear in front of the subject. Now I will be recommending ‘Tracking’ as the default AF Area for shooting action/sports.

    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    My Dial Settings

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial/Wheel Setup

    You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 9 (Custom operation settings page 2)

    Custom movie operations page 2

    Func. of Touch Oper.

    Select the functionality of the touch screen. There are three choices:

    1. Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
    2. Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.
    3. Touch tracking: select your subject via the touch screen to start tracking.
    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the Movie button.

    Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

    Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to “Movie/S&Q Motion” mode.

    Dial/Wheel Lock

    You can set whether the dials and wheels will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 1 (Wireless settings page 1)

    Menu, Network settings, page 1

    Send To Smartphone

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A6100 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6100 screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the Sony A6100 using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your Sony A6100 through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC), but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset on some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A6100.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony A6100 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 2 (Wireless settings page 2)

    network settings page 2

    Bluetooth Settings

    Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the Sony A6100 and smartphone to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony A6100, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)

    1. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
    2. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
    3. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    4. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    5. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. The pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    6. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].
    7. (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking it with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A6100 using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6100 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1 (Playback settings page 1)

    Playback settings page 1

    Protect

    Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

    Rating

    Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key)

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 2)

    MENU - playback options - page 2

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First, shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Initial Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Position

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either the image center or the focus position.

    Cont. PB for interval

    Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

    You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge. You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

    PB Speed for interval

    Sets the playback speed for still images during Continuous PB for an interval.

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 3)

    playback menu page 3

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    View Mode

    Select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display as group

    When shooting bursts of images in Continuous Shooting it is possible during playback to see the groups of images rather than all images. When cycling through the groups you can see individual images in that group by pressing the Center Button in the Control Wheel.

    Display Rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Image Jump Setting

    Image Jump Settings allows you to choose which images you choose to see when reviewing them in Playback, e.g., you can choose only to see your rated images. This will be useful to implement when you want to show somebody just your hero images from the day’s shoot.

    You can see all images by using the dial you have NOT assigned to see only the rated images.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 1

    camera setup menu page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a linear tab style menu layout.

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 2

    camera setup menu page 2

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

    Power Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    Auto Power OFF Temp. 

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A6100 turns off automatically during shooting (overheating). When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A6100 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 3

    camera setup menu page 3

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.”

    Touch Panel/Pad
    • Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    Touch Pad Settings

    Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    • Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.
    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A6100 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Select

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 4

    camera setup menu page 4

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A6100 to your PC or MAC.

    Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

    MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer

    USB LUN Setting

    It improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection. Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A6100 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A6100 for the first time.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 5

    camera setup menu page 5

    Area Settings

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A6100 for the stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the Sony A6100 will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 6

    camera setup menu page 6

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony A6100 to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the various shooting Modes available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial 

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen. These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode. The Sony A6100 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though). Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button. Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting. Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6100 (you can’t change the range).

    P (Program Auto):

    Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting. See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen (Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…); tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)

    A (Aperture Priority):

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8). The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers. Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh). Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus. If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S (Shutter Priority):

    The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure. If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

    Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.

    M (Manual Exposure):

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording. Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value. When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

    If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.

    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars, or fireworks.

    Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

    Tips:

    Use a tripod for long exposures.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

    Is Smile Shutter activated?

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting. Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording. Menu:

    Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.

    Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.

    TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU–.

    Scene Selection Mode (SCN)

    It allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation. The Sony A6100 has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens. This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).

    Sports Action:

    Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The Sony A6100 will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Sunset:

    Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. 

    Hand-held Twilight:

    Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using the flash. The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.

    Anti Motion Blur:

    It allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.

    Other essential Sony A6100 functions

    Eye AF

    Eye AF has been totally updated since the A6100. Its no longer necessary to push a button to engage Eye AF. It is now also possible to select either the left or the right Eye!

    MENU – (Camera Settings1) – Face/Eye AF Set. – desired setting item.
    Face Priority in AF

    Sets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is activated. ([On]/[Off])

    Right/Left Eye Select

    Specifies the eye to be detected. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only the selected eye is detected.
    [Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
    [Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    [Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

    Face Detect. Frame Disp.:

     Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when [Face Priority in AF] is set to [On]. ([On]/[Off])

    Auto Obj. Framing (not available in RAW)

    Menu – Red camera icon- page 13- Auto Obj. Framing – desired setting (On or Off)

    When the A6100 detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by Lock-on AF, the Sony A6100 automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition and saves it.

    Live View Display

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 7 – Live View Display – desired setting

    Live view shows your images as they’ll appear out of the camera, with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect on the screen.

    • Setting Effect ON (default setting and Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Sweep Panorama, Movie or Scene Selection): Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen. Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in Manual Exposure mode.
    • Setting Effect OFF: Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect. This is useful for precisely checking your composition in particular conditions. Like when you use a third-party Flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings.
    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 4 – e-Front Curtain Shut – desired setting ON or OFF

    Yes the Sony A6100 has an electronic front curtain shutter! This shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

    Remember that when you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

    When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, turn this function off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set, or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Lens compensation features

    The Sony A6100 has a range of built-in lens compensation functions. I can see this being useful for journalism and sports shooters who want to quickly get their jpegs to their editors with the minimum amount of editing.

    Shading Comp.

    MENU – Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Shading Comp – desired setting ( Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen caused by certain lenses.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Chromatic Aberration Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp –  Chro. Aber. Comp  – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Reduces the color deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Distortion Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Distortion Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by particular lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses and with some cannot be turned Off.

    Memory card issues

    Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:

    • Unable to magnify images on the card.
    • Buffer related problems.
    • Inability to read the memory card.
    • SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.

    Make sure you:

    • Format the memory card once you’ve inserted it in the camera.
    • If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of the Sony A6100 FR and Buffer.
    • If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
    • An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for best performance in burst mode.
    • Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.

    Conclusion

    Here it is, the advanced manual for the Sony A6100 with plenty of tips and tricks to get you started. If you’re somewhat overwhelmed by this large post, I would suggest that you use the search function in a browser like Chrome at first to find the subject you are actually looking for.

    If you have any questions or need extra information on any subject covered here, feel free to write something in the comments section below. Have Fun!

  • Sony A6600: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A6600: settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    The Sony A6600 has some brand new features like the larger capacity battery, a grip, and turbocharged tracking autofocus. Like the A6500, the new A6600 features 5-axis in-body image stabilization, a 24.2-megapixel APS-C Exmor CMOS image sensor, and super-fast autofocus (AF), which can find the subject in 0.02 seconds.

    If you’re looking for an advanced guide for the Sony A6600 with tips and tricks to improve your understanding of this little wonder, you’ve come to the right place. I believe that the best way to learn all the features and functions is to have a good look at the menu system and gradually try to understand how everything works. This might take some time if you’ve never owned a Sony mirrorless, and even if you have, the menus have totally changed it this product. You can bookmark this page and simply refer back to it or continue reading whenever you feel like it.

    If you are looking for an A6000, A6100A6300 A6400 or A6500 guide, you can find them by clicking on the camera name.

    So take your ILCE-A6600, press the Menu button and follow along.

    Sony A6600 camera Menu system walkthrough

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 (Quality settings and image size settings page 1)

    Quality and Image size settings page 1

    File Format:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A6600 pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, the resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:

    • Long Exposure NR
    • Bulb
    • Cont. Shooting (including continuous shooting in Superior Auto)
    • Silent Shooting
    JPEG Quality

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    JPEG Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:

    • L: 24M
    • M: 12M
    • S: 6M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 20M
    • M: 10M
    • S:5.1M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 1:1:

    • L: 16M
    • M: 8M
    • S: 4M
    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 16:9 (crop but a more broad view) or 1:1 for Instagram. Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later when you shoot RAW.

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2 (Quality settings and image size settings page 1)

    Quality and Image size settings page 2

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp

    The Sony A6600 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance. 

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 3 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 1)

    Shoot mode and drive settings page 1

    Scene Selection

    It allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. (like when setting the mode dial to SCN)

    Menu item details
    • Portrait: Blurs the background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
    • Sports Action: Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Macro: Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
    • Landscape: Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
    • Sunset: Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
    • Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
    • Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing. Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterward, to name just one example.

    You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

    • Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds has elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
    • WB Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. It also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket Order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    interval shoot Func.

    The Interval Shooting Function is a built-in Intervalometer that can be setup up to take images at regular intervals. Using Sony’s ‘Imaging Edge’ edit application these still images can be used to create a Time-Lapse movie. On the second page of options, you will see that there is an option for Silent Shooting which will save the wear and tear on your camera when shooting thousands of images. If you would prefer the camera to make a movie so that you don’t have to process the files you can use the new S&Q feature.

    Menu item details

    Interval Shooting: Sets whether to perform interval shooting. (On or Off)

    • Shooting Start Time: Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds)
    • Shooting Interval: Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second to 60 seconds)
    • Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
    • AE Tracking Sensitivity: Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select Low, exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. (High, Mid or Low)
    • Silent Shoot. in Interval: Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. (On or Off)
    • Shoot Interval Priority: Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is Program Auto or Aperture Priority and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for Shooting Interval.(On or Off)

    A little bit of background: The A6600 was the last A6000 series camera that used the ‘PlayMemories Apps’. These Apps could be purchased from Sony to add specialized functions to the camera. One of the most useful of these was the TimeLapse App. Sony has added this functionality to the A6600 via the new Interval Shooting Function.

    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A6600. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2)

    Shoot mode and drive settings page 2

    Reg. custom shoot set

    You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

    Setup process
    1. MENU –  Camera Settings 1 – Reg Cust Shoot Set – Select a registration number from Recall Custom hold 1 to Recall Custom hold 3.
    2. Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the checkboxes for the functions that you want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.
    3. Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
    4. Select Register.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 5 (Autofocus settings page 1)

    autofocus settings page 1

    Focus Mode:

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony A6600 will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard-setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The Sony A6600 will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The Sony A6600 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    You can see a focus indicator on-screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.

    Tip: if autofocus doesn’t seem to be working, check the lens barrel to see if the AF/MF slider is set to AF. It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for greater flexibility in composition.

    Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.

    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

    I have set my Priority Set in AF-C to release and usually get the quoted frame rates.

    Focus area

    The Sony A6600 has a dual-phase/contrast on-sensor autofocus system This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered on your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A6600 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject-centered.
    • Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to the desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A6600 will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible Spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Tracking: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor at Tracking on the Focus Area setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or expand flexible spot. Accurate tracking can also make a difference when you lock onto a specific part of your subject.

    Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot, Expand Flexible Spot or Zone by touching the screen.

    Focus area limit

    It is now possible to limit the choice of focus areas you have to cycle through to find the one you are looking for. I typically use the Expand Flexible Spot in preference to the Small, Medium and Large Flexible Spots and the Center AF area. I have unselected these options. This is useful on the A6600 because it is possible to assign a custom button to cycle through the ones that remain.

    Switch V/H AF Area

    This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

    • Off: disable this feature
    • AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A6600 will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.
    • AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A6600 will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

    t may not be immediately obvious what functionality this menu item provides. The full unabbreviated name is Switch Vertical /Horizontal AF Area and it allows you to create one position for the AF point when the camera is held horizontally and a different AF position for the AF point if the camera is held vertically. This means that if you place the AF point in the top right-hand corner it won’t move to the top left or bottom right-hand corners when the camera is turned.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6 (Autofocus settings page 2)

    autofocus settings page 2

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A6600 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Face/Eye AF Set.

    This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus on priority on human faces or eyes.

    Eye AF Settings:
    • Face-Priority in AFSets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes Eye AF when autofocus is activated. (On or Off)
    • Subject detection: either human or animal for animal eye AF
    • Right/Left Eye Select: Specifies the eye to be detected. If the Right Eye or Left Eye is selected, only the selected eye is detected.  Auto: The camera detects eyes automatically. Right Eye: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected. Left Eye: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    • Face Detect. Frame Disp.: Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when Face Priority in AF is set to On. (On or Off)
    • Animal Eye Display: this will show a square around the eye of the animal, indicating focus.
    Eye AF by custom key

    The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning Eye AF to a custom key. The camera can focus on human eyes as long as you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen regardless of the setting for Focus Area.
    For instance, if Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot and you want the camera to focus on an eye outside of the focusing frame, you can apply the Eye AF function by pressing the custom key to which Eye AF has been assigned, without changing Focus Area.

    Switch Right/Left Eye by custom key

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Right Eye or Left Eye, you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Auto, you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    The temporary left/right selection is canceled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to automatic eye detection.

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    Pre-AF

    Pre-AF by default was normally set to OFF on previous models. This can be a useful feature when taking selfies but can cause issues in Continuous AF (AF-C) with an AF Tracking Area selected. The camera is likely to latch on to a subject before you have identified which subject you would like to track. I recommend switching this to OFF if you are more interested in shooting action/sports rather than selfies.

    Eye-Start AF:

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Area Registration:

    You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

    How to register the focus area
    1. MENU –  Camera Settings1 – AF Area Registration – On.
    2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
    How to call up the registered focus area
    1. MENU – Camera Settings2 – Custom Key – desired key, then select Regist. AF Area holds.
    2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which Regist. AF Area hold has been assigned and then press the shutter button to shoot images.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 (Autofocus settings page 3)

    autofocus settings page 3

    Del. Regist. AF Area:

    Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using the AF Area Registration.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Disp. cont. AF Area:

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when the Focus Area is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    Circ. of Focus Point:

    This is a new feature that, when set to ‘Circulate’, will allow the photographer to move a spot or zone AF point over the edge of the frame and have it reappear on the other side of the frame.

    Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with Focus Area set to Zone, Flexible Spot, or Expand Flexible Spot. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.

    • Does Not Circulate: The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
    • circulate: the cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
    AF Micro Adj.

    It allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 8 (Exposure settings page 1)

    Exposure settings page 1

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO setting

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    You’ll also find the ISO Auto Minimum Shutter Speed’ setting here. This function enables the camera to give priority to faster shutter speeds with the disadvantage that you’ll go to higher ISO numbers more quickly. I add this menu item to my Fn menu for quick access. ISO can be modified from the right side of the Control Wheel.

    Metering Mode

    This feature appeared in the A6600 and allows the user to take a spot meter reading from the position of the Spot AF point. If you change the setting to Focus Point Link you will also need to set the metering Mode and the AF Area to Spot.

    Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A6600 reads the light and sets the exposure. In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera. In spot or center, the Sony A6600 only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or  Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to Focus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Face Priority in Multi…

    Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when Metering Mode is set to Multi.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.

    Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 (Exposure settings page 2)

    Exposure settings page 2

    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The Sony A6600 keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10 (flash settings)

    Flash settings

    Flash Mode:

    If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony A6600 to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick. What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if you want to trigger an external flash like the Sony with a hotshoe trigger. Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set:

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function (+-5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Wireless Flash:

    There are two methods for wireless flash shooting:

    1. light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the camera as a signal light,
    2. radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 (Color, White Balance, and Image processing settings page 1)

    color and white balance settings page 2

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.

    Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.

    White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid color to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to your RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to color.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
    • You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.
    • This functionality can be changed:
    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference between light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A6600, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image that retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: It creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of Gamma (gamma curve) and Color Mode (color characteristics) settings.

    Gamma:
    • Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
    • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
    • Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
    • Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
      Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
    • Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
    • Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
    • ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
    • ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
    • S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
    • S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with the camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
    Color Mode:
    • Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
    • Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
    • Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
    • Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
    • ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
    • Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
      S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
    • S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
    • This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
    • S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
      This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
      Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
    Black Level:

    This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to +15.  As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

    Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting the Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

    This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting the Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma:

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. The range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and +7.

    [Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

    Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee:

    This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your Sony A6600.

    First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode] and then adjust each setting.

    Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual

    Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%

    Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low

    Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%

    Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to +5

    Mode:

    Auto:

    Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).[Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.[Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal. When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].

    Manual:

    Sticks to settings based on the following selections.[Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.[Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
    A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to +5, the Knee function is disabled.Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.

    Saturation

    A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.

    Color Phase

    As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

    Color Depth

    This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

    A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
    This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors but also can express deep, dark colors.
    Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

    Emphasizing image edges (Detail)

    This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.

    Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

    Level

    This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

    If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.

    Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)

    Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.

    The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12 (Color, White Balance and Image processing settings page 2)

    Color, White balance settings

    Shutter AWB Lock

    You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when White Balance is set to Auto or Underwater Auto. This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the shutter button pressed halfway down.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13 (Focus assist settings)

    Focus assist menu

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A6600 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

    Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

    Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking Setting
    Peaking Level

    Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your Sony A6600 set to MF or DMF.

    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white, blue and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 14 (Face Detection and shoot assist settings)

    Shooting Assist menu

     

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – Camera Settings 1 – Face Registration – New Registration
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select Enter.
    Regist. Faces Priority

    Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using Face Registration when Face Priority in AF]is set to On.

    Self-portrait/ -timer

    As you probably know, you can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.

    Simple turn this setting on, flip the screen and press the shutter button. The camera will start shooting after three seconds.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1 (Movie settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 1

    Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    S&Q Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S H or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    Record Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of the recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p or 25p 100M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 30p or 25p 60M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 24p 100M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
    • 24p 60M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 60p 25M/50p 25M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 30p 16M25p 16M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 24p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    • 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A6600:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/S&Q Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned Record Setting and  the Frame Rate.

    Proxy Recording
    This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

    MENU –Purple Camera Icon– page 2 (Movie settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 2

    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

    Sets the initial magnification scale for the Focus Magnifier functionality in the movie shooting mode. You can choose between 1 or 4 times magnification to check focus.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    MENU -Purple Camera Icon- page 3 (Movie settings page 3)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 2

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.

    During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. (Off or On)
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. (Off, 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.66:1, 1.85:1, 2.35:1)
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. (Off, 80%, 90%)
    • Guide frame: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Movie w/ shutter

    You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the Movie button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 4 (Shutter and Steadyshot settings)

    steady shot settings

    Silent Shooting

    You can shoot images without the shutter sound, i.e. only using the electronic shutter.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to Off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Release without lens

    It makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the Sony A6600. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function. For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A6600 body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.

    • Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
    • Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using “SteadyS. Focal Len.” (8mm-1000mm)
    SteadyShot settings
    • Auto (default setting): Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
    • Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8 mm-1000 mm)

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 5 (zoom settings)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 5

    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom functionality on or off.

    Zoom setting

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens. Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image).

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the Sony A6600 are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the Sony A6600 uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    Zoom ring rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 6 (Display and Auto Review settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 6

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Finder Frame Rate

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    • 120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
    • 60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
    Zebra setting

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping.

    You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.

    The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.

    I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 7 (Display and Auto Review settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 7

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 8 (Custom operation settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 8

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key Shoot.]and Custom Key PB.

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3

    In the Custom Key menu, I have assigned the AEL button to cycle between the 6 remaining AF area. I typically start wide and only come down in size if I am trying to avoid picking up subjects that are nearer to the camera than my primary subject. Some will start with an Expand Flexible Spot but you have to be quick at moving the Spot onto a moving target to start the tracking in order to be successful.

    Prior to the new AF Tracking, I would normally recommend people to use a Wide or Zone AF area and only use Lock-on AF Areas when obstacles might appear in front of the subject. Now I will be recommending ‘Tracking’ as the default AF Area for shooting action/sports.

    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    My Dial Settings

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial/Wheel Setup

    You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 9 (Custom operation settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 9

    Av/Tv Rotate

    Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.

    Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

    You can compensate for the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    Func. of Touch Oper.

    Select the functionality of the touch screen. There are three choices:

    1. Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
    2. Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.
    3. Touch tracking: select your subject via the touch screen to start tracking.
    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the Movie button.

    Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

    Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to the “Movie/S&Q Motion” mode.

    Dial/Wheel Lock

    You can set whether the dials and wheels will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 1 (Wireless settings page 1)

    Menu, Network settings, page 1

    Send To Smartphone

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A6600 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6600 screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the Sony A6600 using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your Sony A6600 through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC), but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A6600.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony A6600 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 2 (Wireless settings page 2)

    network settings page 2

    Bluetooth Settings

    Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the Sony A6600 and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony A6600, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application of PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)

    1. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
    2. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
    3. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    4. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    5. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    6. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].
    7. (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking it with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A6600 using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6600 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1 (Playback settings page 1)

    Playback settings page 1

    Protect

    Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

    Rating

    Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key)

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 2)

    MENU - playback options - page 2

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First, shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Initial Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Position

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either the image center or the focus position.

    Cont. PB for interval

    Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

    You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge. You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

    PB Speed for interval

    Sets the playback speed for still images during Continuous PB for the interval.

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 3)

    playback menu page 3

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    View Mode

    Select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display as group

    When shooting bursts of images in Continuous Shooting it is possible during playback to see the groups of images rather than all images. When cycling through the groups you can see individual images in that group by pressing the Center Button in the Control Wheel.

    Display Rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Image Jump Setting

    Image Jump Settings allows you to choose which images you choose to see when reviewing them in Playback, e.g., you can choose only to see your rated images. This will be useful to implement when you want to show somebody just your hero images from the day’s shoot.

    You can see all images by using the dial you have NOT assigned to see only the rated images.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 1

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to your liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded videos or demos.

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a linear tab style menu layout

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 2

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 2

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. It can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

    Power Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    Auto Power OFF Temp. 

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A6600 turns off automatically during shooting (overheating). When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 3

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 3

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A6600 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touchpad operations.”

    Touch Panel/Pad
    • Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    Touch Pad Settings

    Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    • Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.
    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A6600 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for the synchronization of the video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 4

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 4

    Remote CTRL

    You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A6600 to your PC or MAC.

    Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

    MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer

    USB LUN Setting

    It improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection. Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A6600 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 5

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 5

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A6600 for the first time.

    Area Settings

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A6600 for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 6

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 6

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Set File Name

    Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the Sony A6600 will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 7

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 7

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony A6600 to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the various shooting Modes available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial 

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen. These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode. The Sony A6600 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though). Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button. Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting. Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6600 (you can’t change the range).

    P (Program Auto):

    Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting. See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen (Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…); tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)

    A (Aperture Priority):

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8). The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers. Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh). Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus. If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S (Shutter Priority):

    The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure. If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

    Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use slow shutter speed.

    M (Manual Exposure):

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording. Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value. When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

    If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.

    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with long exposure time. Think light trails from cars or fireworks.

    Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

    Tips:

    Use a tripod for long exposures.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting. Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording. Menu:

    Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    It allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.

    Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.

    TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU.

    Scene Selection Mode (SCN)

    It allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation. The Sony A6600 has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens. This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).

    Sports Action:

    Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The Sony A6600 will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Sunset:

    Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. 

    Hand-held Twilight:

    Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using a hotshoe flash.

    Anti Motion Blur:

    Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.

    Other essential Sony A6600 functions

    Eye AF

    Eye AF has been totally updated since the A6600. Its no longer necessary to push a button to engage Eye AF. It is now also possible to select either the left or the right Eye!

    MENU – (Camera Settings1) – Face/Eye AF Set. – desired setting item.
    Face Priority in AF

    Sets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is activated. ([On]/[Off])

    Right/Left Eye Select

    Specifies the eye to be detected. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only the selected eye is detected.
    [Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
    [Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    [Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

    Face Detect. Frame Disp.:

     Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when [Face Priority in AF] is set to [On]. ([On]/[Off])

    Auto Obj. Framing (not available in RAW)

    Menu – Red camera icon- page 13- Auto Obj. Framing – desired setting (On or Off)

    When the A6600 detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by Lock-on AF, the Sony A6600 automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition and saves it.

    Live View Display

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 7 – Live View Display – desired setting

    Live view shows your images as they’ll appear out of the camera, with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect on the screen.

    • Setting Effect ON (default setting and Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Sweep Panorama, Movie or Scene Selection): Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen. Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in Manual Exposure mode.
    • Setting Effect OFF: Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect. This is useful for precisely checking your composition in particular conditions. Like when you use a third-party Flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings.
    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 4 – e-Front Curtain Shut – desired setting ON or OFF

    Yes the Sony A6600 has an electronic front curtain shutter! This shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

    Remember that when you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

    When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, turn this function off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set, or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Lens compensation features

    The Sony A6600 has a range of built-in lens compensation functions. I can see this being useful for journalism and sports shooters who want to quickly get their jpegs to their editors with the minimum amount of editing.

    Shading Comp.

    MENU – Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Shading Comp – desired setting ( Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen caused by certain lenses.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Chromatic Aberration Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp –  Chro. Aber. Comp  – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Reduces the colour deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Distortion Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Distortion Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by particular lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses and with some cannot be turned Off.

    Memory card issues

    Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:

    • Unable to magnify images on the card.
    • Buffer related problems.
    • Inability to read the memory card.
    • SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.

    Make sure you:

    • Format the memory card once you’ve inserted it in the camera.
    • If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of the Sony A6600 FR and Buffer.
    • If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
    • An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for the best performance in burst mode.
    • Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.

    Conclusion

    Here it is, the advanced manual for the Sony A6600 with plenty of tips and tricks to get you started. If you’re somewhat overwhelmed by this large post, I would suggest that you use the search function in a browser like Chrome at first to find the subject you are actually looking for.

    If you have any questions or need extra information on any subject covered here, feel free to write something in the comments section below. Have Fun!

  • RX100VII setup guide with tips and tricks

    Sony RX100 VII settings, tips, and tricks

    Introduction

    Welcome to my Sony RX100 VII advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this nice little compact camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

    If you’re coming from earlier versions, the latest Sony RX100 VII has a few added features and you’ll see a few new features in the menus too. This new SonyRX compact camera is packed full of technologies that were previously only available in our a9 full-frame camera and allows creators to achieve new levels of performance using a compact camera for both stills and movie shooting.

    By the way, I have different guides with tips and settings for the other RX100 series cameras too:

    Since the Sony RX100 VII has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those.

    I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way. If you’re a bit impatient, there is a more abbreviated “best settings” chapter before my conclusion.

    Diving into the Sony RX100 VII MENU system

    When you switch on your Sony RX100 VII, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 1 of 14 (Quality settings and image size page 1)

    camera settings page 1 of 14

    File Format

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony RX100 VII pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A jpeg is a compressed imagewhich takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    Jpeg Quality

    Jpeg is available in EXTRA FINE (best Quality) FINE (medium Quality) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality).

    Jpeg Image size

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 20M 5472×3648 pixels
    • M: 10M 3888×2592 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2736×1824 pixels

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 4:3:

    • L: 18M 4864×3648 pixels
    • M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels VGA 640×480 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

    • L: 17M 5472×3080 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
    • S: 4.2M 2720×1528 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1

    • L: 13M 3648×3648 pixels
    • M: 6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
    • S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels

    Note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

    If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3, 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Panorama Size:

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony RX100 VII to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the Sony RX100 VII to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 2 of 14 (Quality settings and image size page 2)

    camera settings page 2 of 14

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 3 (Shoot mode and drive settings)

    camera settings page 3 of 14

    Auto Mode

    Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

    The Sony RX100 VII will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

    Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.

    This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed range and only useable for jpeg shooting.

    Scene Selection

    You can select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here

    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Hi: takes about six images per second, Lo about 3
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10 seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes)
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    interval shoot Func.

    The Interval Shooting Function is a built in Intervalometer that can be setup up to take images at a regular intervals. Using Sony’s ‘Imaging Edge’ edit application these still images can be used to create a Time Lapse movie. On the second page of options you will see that there is an option for Silent Shooting which will save the wear and tear on your camera when shooting thousands of images. If you would prefer the camera to make a movie so that you don’t have to process the files you can use the new S&Q feature.

    Menu item details

    Interval Shooting: Sets whether to perform interval shooting. (On or Off)

    • Shooting Start Time: Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds)
    • Shooting Interval: Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second to 60 seconds)
    • Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
    • AE Tracking Sensitivity: Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select Low, exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. (High, Mid or Low)
    • Silent Shoot. in Interval: Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. (On or Off)
    • Shoot Interval Priority: Sets whether or not to prioritise the shooting interval when the exposure mode is Program Auto or Aperture Priority and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for Shooting Interval.(On or Off)

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 4 of 14 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2)

    camera settings page 4 of 14

    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A6100. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 5 of 14 (Autofocus settings page 1)

    camera settings page 5 of 14

    Focus Mode:

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the RX will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The Sony RX100 VII will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The RX100 VII focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    You can see a focus indicator on screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.

    Tip: It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for a greater flexibility in composition.

    Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.

    Focus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘wide’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Wide:

    Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony RX100 VII to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)

    Expandable flexible spot

    If the RX100 M7 cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing

    Tracking

    When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the RX100 M7 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor at Tracking on the Focus Area setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or expand flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the focusing frame by turning the control wheel.

    Moving the focus area:

    • When Focus Area is set to ZoneFlexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot, if pressing the button to which Focus Standard is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the button while moving the frame. To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which Focus Standard is assigned.
    • You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set Touch Operation to On and set Func. of Touch Operation to Touch Focus beforehand.

    To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On): You can temporarily change the setting for Focus Area to Tracking while you press and hold down the custom key to which you have assigned Tracking On in advance. The Focus Area setting before you activated Tracking On will switch to the equivalent Tracking setting.

    Focus area limit

    It is now possible to limit the choice of focus areas you have to cycle through to find the one you are looking for. I typically use the Expand Flexible Spot in preference to the Small, Medium and Large Flexible Spots and the Center AF area. I have unselected these options. This is useful on the RX100 M7 because it is possible to assign a custom button to cycle through the ones that remain.

    Swt. V/H AF Area

    This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

    Off: disable this feature

    AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX100 VII will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

    AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX100 VII will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

    It may not be immediately obvious what functionality this menu items provides. The full unabbreviated name is Switch Vertical /Horizontal AF Area and it allows you to create one position for the AF point when the camera is held horizontally and a different AF position for the AF point if the camera is held vertically. This means that if you place the AF point in the top right-hand corner it won’t move to the top left or bottom right-hand corners when the camera is turned.

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony RX100 VII to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Face/Eye AF Set.

    This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus with priority on human faces or eyes.

    human/animal Eye AF

    Eye AF Settings:
    • Face Priority in AF: Sets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes Eye AF when autofocus is activated. (On or Off)
    • Subject detection: either human or animal for animal eye AF
    • Right/Left Eye Select: Specifies the eye to be detected. If Right Eye or Left Eye is selected, only the selected eye is detected.  Auto : The camera detects eyes automatically. Right Eye : The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected. Left Eye : The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    • Face Detect. Frame Disp.:Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when Face Priority in AF is set to On. (On or Off)
    • Animal Eye Display: this will show a square around the eye of the animal , indicating focus.
    Switch Right/Left Eye by custom key

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Right Eye or Left Eye, you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Auto, you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to automatic eye detection.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6 of 14 (Autofocus settings page 2)

    camera settings page 6 of 14

    Pre-AF 

    Select if the Sony RX100 VII will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. This can be a useful feature when taking selfies but can cause issues in Continuous AF (AF-C) with an AF Tracking Area selected. The camera is likely to latch on to a subject before you have identified which subject you would like to track. I recommend switching this to OFF if you are more interesting in shooting action/sports rather than selfies.

    AF Area regist.

    You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

    How to register focus area
    1. MENU –  Camera Settings1 – AF Area Registration – On.
    2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
    How to call up the registered focus area
    1. MENU – Camera Settings2 – Custom Key – desired key, then select Regist. AF Area hold.
    2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which Regist. AF Area hold has been assigned and then press the shutter button to shoot images.
    Del. Reg. AF Area

    Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using AF Area regist.

    Focus Frame Color

    You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject, make it more visible by changing its color. Either white or red.

    AF Area Auto Clear

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved. On Or Off.

    Disp cont. AF area

    You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when Focus Area is set to Wide or Zone, in Continuous AF mode.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 7 of 14 (Autofocus settings page 3)

    camera settings page 7 of 14

    Phase Detect. Area 

    Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.

    Circ. of Focus Point

    This is a new feature that, when set to ‘Circulate’, will allows the photographer to move a spot or zone AF point over the edge of the frame and have it reappear on the other side of the frame.

    Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with Focus Area set to Zone, Flexible Spot, or Expand Flexible Spot. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.

    • Does Not Circulate :The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
    • Circulate :The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 8 of 14 (Exposure settings page 1)

    camera settings page 8 of 14

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the Fn button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO settings
    ISO

    Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher the sensitivity.

    • Multi Frame NR:Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Press the right side to display the setting screen, then select a desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel. Select the desired ISO number from ISO AUTO or ISO 100 – ISO 25600.
    • ISO AUTO: Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
    • ISO 64 – ISO 12800:Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

    ISO Range Limit: Adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the ISO AUTO mode.  Shooting at lower ISO will result in a better quality picture. An upper limit of 1600 will ensure that your images won’t have too much noise.

    Iso Auto Min SS.

    This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in  P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between Faster, Fast, Standard, Slow, and Slower is 1 EV.

    You have three possibilities here:

    • FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the Sony RX100 VII is capable of doing so.
    • STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
    • 1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the Sony RX100VII reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    In spot or center, the Sony RX100 VII only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for Spot Metering Point.
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to Focus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Face Priority in Multi Metering Mode

    A very interesting addition to the metering possibilities. When Metering mode is set to multi, this function allows you to set the priority of the light metering to detected faces for a better exposure. great for portraits.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    • Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
    • Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The Sony RX100 VII keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 9 of 14 (Exposure settings page 2)

    camera settings page 9 of 14

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 10 of 14 (Flash settings)

    camera settings page 10 of 14

    Flash Mode
    • Flash Off: The flash does not operate.
    • Autoflash: The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony RX100 VII to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 11 of 14 (Color, White Balance, and Image processing settings page 1)

    camera settings page 11 of 14

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    • Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
    • Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
    • White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
    • You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.
    • This functionality can be changed:
    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony  RX100 VII, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasising color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

    The default settings PP1 through PP10 for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting conditions.

    • PP1: Example setting using Movie gamma.
    • PP2: Example setting using Still gamma.
    • PP3: Example setting of natural color tone using the ITU709 gamma.
    • PP4:  Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
    • PP5: Example setting using Cine1 gamma.
    • PP6: Example setting using Cine2 gamma.
    • PP7: Example setting using S-Log2 gamma.
    • P8: Example setting using the S-Log3:gamma and the under Color Mode.
    • PP9: Example setting using the S-Log3gamma and the under Color Mode.
    • PP10: Example setting for recording HDR movies using HLG2 gamma.

    HDR movie recording

    The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from HLGHLG1 to HLG3 is selected in the picture profile. Picture profile preset PP10 provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using PP10can be viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG). This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation ITU-R BT.2100.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of Gamma (gamma curve) and Color Mode (color characteristics) settings.

    Items of the picture profile

    Black Level:
    sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
    Gamma:
    • Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
    • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
    • Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
    • Cine2: Similar to Cine1 but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
    • ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
    • ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
    • S-Log2: Gamma curve for S-Log2. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    • S-Log3: Gamma curve for S-Log3 with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    • HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
    • HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower dynamic range than with HLG2 or HLG3.
    • HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
    • HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than HLG2. However, noise may increase.
        • HLG1, HLG2, and HLG3 all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows: HLG1: approx. 87%, HLG2: approx. 95%, HLG3: approx. 100%.
    Black Gamma:

    Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.

    Black Gamma is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3.

    • Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
    • Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
    Color Mode:
      • Movie Color tones for Movie gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Still Color tones for Still gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Cinema Color tones for Cine1 and Cine2 gamma curve
      • Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with ITU709 gamma curve)
      • ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with ITU709 gamma curve)
      • Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
        S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log2.
      • S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log3.
      • This setting is easier to use than S-Gamut3, because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of S-Gamut3. It is recommended in cases where S-Gamut3, a wide color space, is not required.
      • S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log3.
        This setting has a wider color space than that of S-Gamut3.Cine. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
        Depending on the type of camera, the entire S-Gamut3 color space may not be supported.
    Black Level:

    This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to +15.  As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

    Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

    This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma:

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and +7.

    Range controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The Narrow setting keeps the range close to black, while the Wide setting extends the range to gray. Range should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, Range should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the Narrow setting.

    Increasing the Level value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set Range to Narrow and decrease the Level value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee

    Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

    Knee is disabled if Mode is set to Auto when Gamma is set to Still, Cine1, Cine2, ITU709(800%), S-Log2, S-Log3, HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3. To enable Knee, set Mode to Manual.

    Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.

    • Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
    • Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

    Auto Set: Settings when Auto is selected for Mode .

    • Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
    • Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

    Manual Set: Settings when Manual is selected for Mode.

    • Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
    • Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
    Color Mode

    Sets type and level of colors.

    In Color Mode, only BT.2020 and 709 are available when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3.

    • Movie: Suitable colors when Gamma is set to Movie.
    • Still: Suitable colors when Gamma is set to Still.
    • Cinema: Suitable colors when Gamma is set to Cine1 or Cine2.
    • Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
    • ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
    • Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
    • S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when Gammais set to S-Log2.
    • S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log3. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital cinema.
    • S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log3. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
    • BT.2020: Standard color tone when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3.
    • 709: Color tone when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3 and movies are recorded with HDTV color (BT.709).

    Saturation

    Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

    Color Phase

    Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

    Color Depth

    Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set Color Mode to Black & White.

    • R -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
    • G -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
    • B -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
    • C -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
    • M -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
    • Y -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

    Detail

    Sets items for Detail.

    Level: Sets the Detail level. (-7 to +7)

    Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.

    • Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
    • V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
    • B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
    • Limit: Sets the limit level of Detail. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
    • Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
    • Hi-Light Detail: Sets the Detail level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 12 of 14 (Color, White Balance and Image processing settings page 2)

    camera settings page 12 of 14

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    Shutter AWB Lock

    You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when White Balance is set to Auto or Underwater Auto. This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the shutter button pressed halfway down.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 13 of 14 (Focus assist settings)

    camera settings page 13 of 14

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A6400 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    1. Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
    2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
    3. Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 14 of 14 (Face Detection and shoot assist settings)

    camera settings page 14 of 14

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when Face Detection is set to On (Regist. Faces). Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – Camera Settings 1 – Face Registration – New Registration
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select Enter.
    Regist. Faces Priority

    Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using Face Registration when Face Priority in AFis set to On.

    Smile Shutter

    Great for selfies as  the camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony 6400 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Self-portrait/ -timer

    As you probably know, you can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.

    Simple turn this setting on, flip the screen and press the shutter button. The camera will start shooting after three seconds.

    MENU – Movie settings – page 1 of 10 (movie settings page 1)

    Movie settings page 1 of 14

    Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

    Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

    Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.

    Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.

    Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

    HFR Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for high frame rate shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with HFR Settings later.

    Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

    Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.

    Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.

    Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    XAVC S 4K: Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160) This format supports a high bit rate.

    XAVC S HD: Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD with larger amounts of data.

    AVCHD: The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than computers.

    Record Setting  (Video):

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p 100M/25p 100M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
    • 30p 60M/25p 60M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
    • 24p 100M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
    • 24p 60M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 60p 25M/50p 25M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 30p 16M/25p 16M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 24p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).
    • 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).
    HFR settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned Frame Rate and Record Setting.

    Record Setting

    Selects the frame rate of the movie from 60p 50M/50p 50M, 30p 50M/25p 50M, and 24p 50M. 

    Frame Rate 

    Selects the shooting frame rate from 240fps/250fps480fps/500fps, and 960fps/1000fps.

    In super-slow-motion movie shooting, the camera shoots at a faster shutter speed than the number of shooting frames per second. For example, when Frame Rate is set to 960fps, the shutter speed per frame will be faster than approx. 1/1000 second in order to shoot 960 frames per second. To maintain this shutter speed, sufficient ambient light is necessary during shooting. If the ambient light is insufficient, the ISO sensitivity will become higher, resulting in more noise.

    Priority Setting

    Select from Quality Priority which prioritizes the image quality and Shoot Time Priority which prioritizes the duration of time of the movie.

    How to record slow motion movie on the Sony RX100 VII:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-Movie/S&Q Motion- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)- S&Q Settings and select the desired settings for Record Setting and Frame Rate.
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned Record Setting and  the Frame Rate.

    REC Timing

    Selects whether to record for a set amount of time after you press the MOVIE button (Start Trigger), or for a set amount of time until you press the MOVIE button (End Trigger/End Trigger Half).

    Quality (Dual Rec)

    Select either Extra Fine, Fine or Standard.

    MENU – Movie settings – page 2 of 10 (movie settings page 2)

    Movie settings page 2 of 9

    Img. Size(Dual Rec)

    Sets the image quality for still images shot when recording a movie.

    Auto Dual Rec

    Sets the shutter to release automatically when an impressive composition including a person is detected during movie shooting.

    Proxy Recording
    This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

    Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as that of the original movie.

    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.

    Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.

    Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.

    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.

    Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.

    Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.

    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.

    Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

    MENU – Movie settings – page 3 (movie settings page 3)

    Movie settings page 2 of 10

    Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

    Sets the initial magnification scale for the Focus Magnifier in the movie shooting mode.

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x4.0: Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.
    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    Selects the audio input level during movie recording.

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    SteadyShot

    Sets which type of steadyshot you want to use.

    • Intelligent Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than Active.
    • Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
    • Standard:Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
    • Off: turns steadyshot off.

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 4)

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 16
    Movie settings page 4

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. Off/On.

    Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display.

    Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. Off/80%/90%

    Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

    Movie w/ shutter

    You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the MOVIE (Movie) button.

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 5)

    Sony RX100 Menu page 17

    Shutter and Steadyshot Settings

    Shutter Type

    Select here if you want to use the Electronic or Mechanical shutter. There is also an auto option, that switches from mechanical to electronic shutter if a flash is detected.

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    Steadyshot

    Turn image stabilisation on or off.

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 6)

    Sony RX100 Menu page 18

    Video zoom settings

    Zoom Setting

    Sets whether to use the Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom when zooming.

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio.

    Zoom Speed

    Sets the zooming speed when you operate the zoom lever.

    Zoom Func. on Ring

    Sets the zooming function of the control ring. When you select Quick, the zoom position moves in accordance with the degree of rotation of the control ring. When you select Step, you can move the zoom position to a fixed step of the focal length.

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 7)

    Sony RX100 Menu page 19

    Display/Auto Review settings

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behaviour of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Zebra setting

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.

    Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.

    Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.

    Off: Does not display the grid line.

    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF,

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 8)

    Sony RX100 Menu page 20

    Display/auto review settings page 2

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 9)

    Sony RX100 Menu page 21

    Custom operations buttons page 1

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)/Custom Key(Movie)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, I assign Eye AF to AF-ON for Custom Key(Shoot.) because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall Eye AF simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Learn how to do this here:

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key(Shoot.) and Custom Key(PB).

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3
    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Av/Tv Rotate

    Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.

    Touch Shoot Set

    Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.

    Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.

    (MENU – Movie settings – page 10)

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 22

    Custom operations buttons page 2

    MOVIIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIIE (Movie) button.

    Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIIE button in any mode.

    MoVIIe Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to Movie/HFR mode.

    Wheel Lock

    You can set whether or not to lock the control wheel when you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

    On: Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    Shutter: Only the shutter sound is produced.

    Off: Sounds are not produced.

    Write Date

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.

    MENU – Network settings- page 1

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 23

    Network settings

     

    Send To Smartphone

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony RX100 mark 6 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the Sony RX100 VII has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network. 

    Ctrl w/ smartphone

    By connecting the Sony RX100 VII to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

    Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the Sony RX to a smartphone.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony DSC-RX100M6.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony RX100 VII shares the connection information for Send to Smartphone and Connection Info. with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Network settings- page 2

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 24

    Network settings page 2

    Bluetooth Settings.

    Controls the settings for connecting the Sony RX100 VII to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony RX100 VII, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the Sony RX and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)

    On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – Bluetooth Settings – Bluetooth Function – On.

    On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – Bluetooth Settings – Pairing.

    Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”

    Activate Location Information Linkage on the Location Information Linkage setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.

    Select OK when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.

    On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – Loc. Info. Link Set. – Location Info. Link – On.

    (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.

    Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony RX100 VII using information from a linked smartphone.

    Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which RX100 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1 of 4

    RX100 VII playpack menu

    Protect

    Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

    Rating

    Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key)

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 26

    Beauty Effect

    Allows you to apply the Beauty Effect to retouch the still image of a person and make it look better, for example, by retouching it for smoother skin, larger eyes, and whiter teeth. You can set the effects from level 1 to level 5. An image on which the Beauty Effect is used is saved as a new file. The original image is retained as it is.

    Skin Toning: Adjusts the skin color as you like.
    Skin Smoothing: Removes age spots and wrinkles from the skin.
    Shine Removal: Reduces the look of oily skin. Adjusts the skin color as you like. 

    Eye Widening: Enlarges the eyes of the subject. Adjust the size of the eyes using up/down.
    Teeth Whitening: Whiten the teeth of the subject. You may not be able to whiten the teeth in some images.

    To apply two or more effects consecutively using Beauty Effect, first apply one effect to the image, and then select another effect using left/right.

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    1. Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
    2. MENU –  (Playback) – Photo Capture.
    3. Play back the movie and pause it.
    4. Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
    5. Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Init. Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Pos.

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

    Motion Interval ADJ

    You can adjust the interval of the tracking of the subject’s motion.

    MENU – playback options – page 3

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page
    Playback menu page 3

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the Sony RX100 VII to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    VIIew Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    underwater bridal shoot

    Display Cont. Shooting Group.

    You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 1 of 7

    RX100 7 setup menu 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the Viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using Gamma Disp. Assist, contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, Gamma Disp. Assist can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/VIIewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Tile Menu

    elects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU button.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 2 of 7

    RX100 VI setup menu page 2

    Mode Dial Guide

    You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for that shooting mode.

    Delete confirm.

    You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality to High or Standard. When High is selected, battery consumption will be higher, and your camera will also heat up faster.

    Auto monitor Off

    The camera automatically switches to the power-saving mode if you do not operate the camera for a certain period of time in the still-image shooting mode. This function is useful for reducing the power consumption.

    Pwr Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    Function for VF close

    Sets whether to turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 3 of 7

    RX100 VII setup menu page 3

     

    Auto Power OFF Temp

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

    RX100 VII extend video recording time

    • Standard: Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
    • High: Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than Standard.

    If you want to make longer videos (longer recording time), set this to high. Your camera will get a little hot, but you’ll have the longest recording time of all Sony’s mirrorless cameras!

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

    Touch Panel/Pad
    Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the VIIewfinder.
    Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    Touch Pad Settings

    You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

    Operation in V Orien.:

    Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    Touch Pos. Mode:

    Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen (Absolute Position), or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement (Relative Position).

    Operation Area:

    Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony RX100 VII has not been used for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronisation of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when NTSC/PAL Selector is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 4

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 31
    General camera setup page 4

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    • Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the Sony RX100 VII memory card.
    • HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your SonyRX100 Mark 69 to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony RX100 VII might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the Sony RX100 6 and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the Sony without leaving the camera.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 5

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 32
    General camera setup page 5

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your RX camera for the first time.

    Area Setting

    Sets where in the world where you are using your Sony RX100 M6.

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 6

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 33
    General camera setup page 6

    Set File Name

    Use the standard file naming system or a customisable one.

    Select REC folder

    If Folder Name is set to Standard Form and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video).

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 7

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 34
    General camera setup page 7

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your Sony RX100 VII and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony camera to factory settings.

    MENU – My menu setting

    My menu page

    This is a new functionality not preVviously seen on many Sony camera.s It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.

    Add Item

    You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.

    Sort Item

    This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

    Delete Item

    Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

    Delete Page

    Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

    Delete All

    Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

    In the next chapter, I’ll go over all the functionality that I find most useful

    Mode dial functions: what’s the difference between intelligent and superior auto?

    Intelligent Auto

    • This mode lets the camera detect what kind of scene you are photographing. It switches to the scene setting it finds most appropriate, including aperture, shutter speed, ISO, and AF mode.
    • These different scene settings are the same you’ll find manually selectable in SCN mode.
    • All Sony cameras do a good job at detecting scenes, although the advanced photographer will prefer to shoot in Aperture, Shutter priority or fully manual mode in order to have more control over things like depth-of-field, movement, and focusing area.

    Superior Auto

    • Does the same scene recognition and (when theSony RX100 VII decides it is appropriate) adds hand-held twilight, anti-motion blur, and backlight correction HDR in order to optimize dynamic range, movement, and exposure.
    • This is only for jpeg shooters, as it uses multiple images shot in close succession at high quality and combines them into one jpeg. Works well on stills but should not be used for movement.

    Zebra highlight clipping aide

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 11
    Focus Assist settings

     

    • Zebra will show zebra pattern lines on blown highlights.
    • The clipping detection threshold is selectable from 70 to 100 . Lower values indicate possible highlight clipping sooner than higher.
    • Setting it somewhere around 90 will give you a good indication of whether you’re in danger of unrecoverable clipping without having the screen cluttered with stripes all the time.

    Manual Focus Assist and Focus Peaking

    Sony RX100 III

    There are two manual focusing assist functions:

    MF assist

    • When set to ON, Magnification will automatically magnify a selectable (through the menu) part of you image when in Manual Focus Mode (MF).
    • MENU – (Custom Settings) – MF Assist – On.
    • The duration of the magnification can also be set to either 2 sec, 5 sec or no limit in the menu Focus Magnification Time. (MENU – (Custom Settings) – Focus Magnif. Time – desired setting.)
    • You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
    1. MENU – (Camera Settings) – Focus Magnifier.
    2. Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel.
    3. You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times.
    4. Confirm the focus.
    5. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

    Peaking

    • This works in MF and DMF focusing modes
    • MENU – (Custom Settings) – Peaking Level – desired setting.
    • It displays a color selectable noise in the regions where the focus is on.
    • A low setting is recommended in enough light on the Sony RX100 IV.
    • In dim light, you might need to go to medium to get a good idea of where the focus is at.

    Center Lock-on AF

    Sony RX100 6 Menu page 4
    Autofocus settings

    Center Lock-on AF

    Depending on the options selected in Focus Area or Center Lock-on AF, the available functions varies when pressing the key. When you press the key when the Focus Area is set to Wide or Center and Center Lock-on AF is On, Center Lock-on AF will activate. The Sony RX100 VII will automatically focus while pressing the key when the Focus Area is Wide or Center, Focus Mode is set to other than Manual Focus, and Center Lock on AF is set to Off.

    • When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.
    • MENU – (Camera Settings) – Center Lock-on AF – On
    • Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press in the center of the control wheel. Press again to stop tracking.
    • If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject reappears on the monitor and resume tracking.
    • Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

    Smile/face detect

    When set to On, The Sony RX100 IV will automatically detect and focus on faces. This is a very powerful feature and can even be made faster by registering faces beforehand. You can even prioritize any of the 8 registered faces according to importance. Ideal for a wedding or family reunion when you know the persons who you are going to photograph.

    1. Go to MENU – (Camera Settings) – Smile/Face Detect. and select either
    2. On (Regist. Faces): Detects the registered face with higher priority using Face Registration.
    3. On: Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.

    How to register faces:

    • MENU – (Custom Settings) – Face Registration – New Registration.
    • Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    • When a confirmation message appears, select Enter.

    Eye AF

    Eye AF is great for portraiture and large apertures. With a shallow depth of field, it is at times difficult to get the appearance of a well-focussed face. The AF system could wonder to an ear or a chin when you finally get that exact shot that you’re looking for.

    Eye EF eliminates this problem by detecting your subject’s eyes and placing the focus point there. It tracks them too. You’ll need to assign a button of your choice in order to make this work.

    1. MENU – (Custom Settings) – Custom Key Settings – assign the Eye AF function to the desired button.
    2. Point the Sony RX100 VII at a person’s face, and press the button to which you have assigned the Eye AF function.
    3. Press the shutter button while pressing the button.

    Exposure aides

    Sony RX100 III

    AE lock

    • When contrast between the subject and background is high, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and shut the exposure before shooting.
    • You’ll need to assign a button to this function to do this in Menu – Custom Settings – Custom Key Setting and then assign the AEL toggle to the desired key.

    Then:

    1. Center the spot at which the exposure is to your liking
    2. Press the button to which the  AEL toggle function is assigned
    3. exposure will be locked, and AE lock lights up.
    4. Focus on your subject and press the shutter button.
    5. To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the AEL toggle function is assigned.

    It’s easiest to select the AEL hold function in Custom Key Settings; then you can lock the exposure as long as
    you are holding down the AEL button.

    Bulb mode

    Bulb mode is great for shooting trails of light, such as fireworks, car lights, etc.

    It’s best to use a remote or the Sony Playmemories remote app (that is downloadable for free) as you want to eliminate movement.

    • Firstly set the mode dial to M.
    • Connect your phone to the Sony RX100 VII using WiFi or NFC.
    • Then:
    1. Dial exposure time to Bulb on the app.
    2. Dial in a suitable Aperture value from F/5.6.
    3. Press the shutter button on the app to start the exposure.
    4. Press the shutter button again on the app to stop the exposure.

    Conclusion

    The Sony RX100 VI brought many new software innovations to the RX line. Besides the ability to record in 4K and make High Frame rate movies, you shouldn’t overlook the many new focusing aides inside the Sony RX100 VII like Eye AF and focus peaking and A9 quality autofocus.

    I hope you found my advanced manual for the RX100 VII with tips and tricks useful. If you have any questions, I’d love to hear from you in the comment section below.

  • Sony A7r IV setup guide with tips and tricks

    Sony A7r IV setup guide with tips and tricks

    Introduction

    Although the Sony A7r IV uses a new 61-megapixel sensor and there are many new features and functions!

    There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Sony models, especially If you upgraded from older models. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.

    Sony A7r IV menu system overview

    MENU – Red Camera Icon –  page 1 of 15 (Quality/Image Size 1)red camera icon page 1 (Quality/Image Size 1)

    File Format:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.image size

    RAW file type:

    You can choose between either compressed or uncompressed RAW. Compressed files are smaller, but there is also a small degradation of quality, especially noticeable in long exposures and scenes with high contrast. If you notice haloing in the sky during post-processing for instance, then this is an artifact of that compression.

    JPEG Quality:

    Standard, fine and extra-fine is selectable. The extra-fine setting will give you the best possible quality JPEG. This includes noise reduction and sharpening from the onboard JPEG engine.

    JPEG Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable. Large is preferred. 

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    APS-C/Super 35mm:

    This setting tells the camera what to do when you’ve attached an APS-C lens to this full-frame camera. An APS-C lens won’t cover the full surface of the sensor, or you’ll notice heavy vignetting towards the edges of the frame. When recording movies, this crop is called Super 35mm. The principle here is that you use any part of the surface of the sensor. If you want to do this, don’t worry too much about image quality as this is a high megapixel camera leaving you with a usable 15MP in APS-C mode.

    • On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
    • Auto: Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.
    • Off: Always captures 35mm full-size image sensor pictures.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2of 15 (Quality/Image Size 2)

    red camera icon page 1 (Quality/Image Size 2)

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp

    The Sony A7r IV allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance. 

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 3 of 15 (shoot Mode/Drive settings 1)

    red camera icon page 1 (Shoot Mode/Drive 1)

    Drive Mode

    As usual, Single and Continuous shooting modes are available. Single will take one exposure when you press the shutter, continuous will continue taking exposures until the buffer fills up. If you want to take advantage of the buffer, you should set your A7rm3 to continuous. If not, the camera will write every exposure separately to your SD card.

    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also, sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket Order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Interval shoot Func.

    You can automatically shoot a series of still images for a time-lapse with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in advance. You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge.

    Pixel Shift Multi Shoot

    The Sony A7r IV  has a new function called Pixel shift. This increases the resolution of your images by 4 times. The camera taxes 4 photos and shifts the sensor 1 pixel in between using the SteadyShot function. This works best when there is no movement in your scene, and these 4 images need to be combined in a special app from Sony called Imaging Edge.

    pixel shift multi shoot settings

    Shooting images remotely using Imaging Edge:
    1. Adjust the settings before shooting.

      Adjust the shooting settings (such as composition, focus, and exposure) while checking the Live View screen in Remote.

      • You can shoot and check a trial image before the actual shooting by setting the number of shots to [1 Photo].
    2. Perform the actual shooting.

      Set the shooting interval and perform the actual shooting.

    3. Combine the images.

      When you are done shooting, the uncombined RAW images (ARW format) are transferred to the computer. Combined RAW data (ARQ format) is generated on the computer.

    4. Adjust and develop.

      You can adjust the RAW data in Edit and develop it into JPEG data, etc

    Combining the images using Imaging Edge after shooting with the camera alone:
    1. Shoot with the camera alone using the Pixel Shift Multi Shooting function.

    2. Import the images to the computer and select the images (ARW) in Viewer.

    3. Combine the images.

      The images are combined and RAW data (ARQ) is generated.

    4. Adjust and develop.

      You can adjust the RAW data in Edit and develop it into JPEG data, etc.

    MR: Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    MR: Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the camera. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    Select Media

    Selects which of the two SD cards will be used to store your personal custom MR settings.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 of 15 (shoot Mode/Drive settings 2)

    red camera icon page 4 (Shoot Mode/Drive 2)

    Select Media

    Selects which of the two SD cards will be used to store your personal custom MR settings.

    Reg Cust Shoot Set

    You can save a number of settings here to a customized  Shoot Set. There are 3 shoot sets available that you can recall at any time. You can import your current settings to one of these three shoot sets. You can also store these on your SD card and move them from camera to camera.

    Reg Cust Shoot Set

    You can save the following settings:

    • Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
    • Aperture
    • Shutter Speed
    • Drive Mode
    • Exposure compensation
    • ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
    • Metering Mode
    • Focus Mode
    • Focus Area
    • AF On

    Reg Cust Shoot Set settings
    You can press Register to save these custom shoot presets to your SD card.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 5 of 15 (autofocus settings page 1)

    red camera icon page 5 (autofocus settings page 1)

    Focus Mode

    Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

    AF-S (Single-shot AF):

    The camera locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.

    AF-C (Continuous AF):

    The camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.

    DMF (DMF):

    You can make fine adjustments manually after performing autofocusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

    MF (Manual Focus):

    Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using autofocus, use manual focus.

    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion. Balanced works great for any type of photography.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
    Focus area

    The Sony A7r IV  has an advanced autofocus system with 567 phase-detection autofocus points and 425 contrast AF points on the sensor. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
    • Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible Spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the camera tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot. If you’re coming from a DSLR, try to use this setting.
    Focus Settings

    Focus setting allows you to use the wheel, joystick or touch screen to move your focus point to any of the 567 on-sensor phase-detection points.

    Focus area limit

    It’s now possible to limit the choice of focus areas you have to cycle through to find the one you want. For instance, many photographers tend to use the Expand Flexible Spot in preference to the Small, Medium and Large Flexible Spots and the Center Area. You can now easily select and deselect these here.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 6 of 15 (autofocus settings page 2)

    red camera icon page 6 (autofocus settings page 2)

    Switch V/H AF area

    This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

    Off: disable this feature

    AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A7r IV will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

    AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A7r IV will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

    This is a new Menu from the 2019 version 3 firmware update. You’ll notice that Face/Eye AF Set has been added.

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony A7r IV is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Face/Eye AF Set

    animal eye AF

    Face/eye Prty in AF

    This will turn on the continuous face and eye detection. As opposed to the previous firmware update, it’s now not necessary to assign and press a custom button to engage eye autofocus. The camera will do this automatically and autonomously from now on.

    Tip: it might however still be a good idea to assign this ON/Off menu item to your old custom button when shooting a variety of scenes (as opposed to only portraits). This means you’ll be able to switch between the camera constantly looking for eyes to lock on too and any other ‘normal’ autofocus mode. It’s also of course still possible to use Eye AF as before, where it will override your selected focus area and the A7 IV will focus on the eye as long as your custom button of choice is pressed.

    Real-time Eye AF works differently with Different focus areas:

    • WIDE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the entire frame.
    • ZONE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the within the selected Zone.
    • CENTER: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the center of the frame (Not recommended)
    • FLEXIBLE SPOT: L,M,S: Eye AF will search & track an eye within the selected Flexible Spot (Large works best for this setting).
    • If you want to focus on a specific animal’s eye when the displayed face of that animal is very small, or two or more animals are displayed on the screen, set the focus area to Flexible Spot and then focus on the subject so that it is easier for the camera to detect the eye.
    • EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the area within or surrounding the Flexible Spot
    • LOCK-ON AF: EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Not compatible with Real-Time Eye AF
    Subject Detection

    Choose between either human or animal subjects for Eye AF. Animal Eye AF works well with cats and dogs for the moment, Sony has promised to further develop this functionality to add other animals too.

    Right/Left eye Select

    Tell the camera to select only the left or right eye. I find this very handy when shooting shallow depth-of-field portraits and getting the dominant eye totally in focus.

    Face Dtct Frame Disp

    Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when a human face is detected. Turn On.

    (Animal) Eye Display

    When On is set, the white eye detection frame appears over the eye. Should be turned on in order to see where the camera is focussing.

    AF track sens:

    High is useful when shooting fast action scenes. The standard mode works fine in most situations, but you can also try responsive if you need faster tracking capabilities. Locked on keeps the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

    Aperture drive in AF

    Depending on the attached lens, the continuous shooting speed differs when the camera  Aperture Drive in AF  is set to  Focus Priority, in combination with the  Priority Set in AF-C settings values.

    • When  Aperture Drive in AF is set to Focus Priority and Priority Set in AF-C is set to Release:
      When the aperture value is greater than F16, the continuous shooting speed slows down, but the focus will track the subject.
    • When Aperture Drive in AF is set to Focus Priority and Priority Set in AF-C is set to Focus Priority or Balanced Emphasis:
      When the aperture value is greater than F11, the continuous shooting speed slows down, but the focus will track the subject.

    Depending on the attached lens, the continuous shooting speed differs when the camera Aperture Drive in AF is set to Focus Priority, in combination with the Priority Set in AF-C settings values.

    • When Aperture Drive in AF is set to Focus Priority and Priority Set in AF-C is set to Release: When the aperture value is greater than F16, the continuous shooting speed slows down regardless of the RAW File Type settings, but the focus will track the subject.
    • When Aperture Drive in AF is set to Focus Priority and Priority Set in AF-C]is set to Focus Priority or Balanced Emphasis:
      When the aperture value is greater than F11, the continuous shooting speed slows down regardless of the RAW File Type settings, but the focus will track the subject.
    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    AF track sens:

    High is useful when shooting fast action scenes. The standard mode works fine in most situations, but you can also try responsive if you need faster tracking capabilities. Locked on keeps the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

    AF system:

    Here you can select the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an Amount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.

    • Phase Detection AF: Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is very fast.
    • Contrast AF: Always focuses with Contrast AF. The focusing speed is slower but more precise. Use when you cannot focus with Phase Detection AF.
    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 of 15 (autofocus settings page 3)

    red camera icon page 7 (autofocus settings page 3)

    Pre-AF

    The camera will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

    Eye-Start AF

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Area Registration

    Another feature inherited from Canon. By registering an AF area/point, you have a quick way to move between points without having the thumb-stick of scroll across the AF field. For example, a bird photographer can set their camera up so they can quickly switch from a spot AF point for precisely focusing on a static subject, to a wide AF pattern for quickly acquiring and tracking a bird in flight.

    Del. Regist. AF Area

    Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.

    Focus Frame Color

    You can choose either red or white as your focus frame colors.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 8 of 15 (autofocus settings page 4)

    red camera icon page 8 (autofocus settings page 4)

    Disp. cont. AF Area

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    Phase Detect Area:

    Use only the phase-detection points.

    Circ. of Focus Point

    Sets whether or not to allow users to hold the focus point at the endmost position or to circulate and select the focus point on the other side when selecting focus points. This means you can move AF point through the left edge of the screen to make it appear on the right side (and vice versa + the same with top/bottom).

    AF Micro Adj.:

    It allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 of 15 (Exposure settings page 1)

    red camera icon page 9 (Exposure settings page 1)

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    Reset EV Comp

    Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.

    ISO setting

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to Focus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Face Priority in Multi Metering Mode

    A very interesting addition to the metering possibilities. When Metering mode is set to multi, this function allows you to set the priority of the light metering to detected faces for a better exposure. great for portraits.

    Spot metering point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10 of 15 (Exposure settings page 2)

    red camera icon page 9 (Exposure settings page 1)

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 of 15 (Flash settings)

    red camera icon page 10 Flash settings)

    Flash Mode:

    (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button)

    If you have purchased a flash for your A7r IV, it’s important to learn about the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the camera will decide when and how you need the flash.

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick. What the slow sync flash mode does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if you want to use a flash or hotshoe trigger to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.

    Notes on using the Sony A7r IV with an off-camera flash system like Godox or Flashpoint:

    • For basic operation, set the camera to ‘ambient’ flash.
    • Turn OFF Live-view display (MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 7).
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Wireless Flash:

    On previous Sony cameras, Wireless was treated as a Flash Mode. This was not a problem except if you wanted wireless flash with Rear-curtain flash sync, which was Flash Mode. The Sony a7R IV separates Wireless Flash from Flash Modes. This enables you to use Wireless Flash in conjunction with Rear-Sync. (Once you enable Wireless Flash in the menu there’s no reason to turn it off)

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12 of 15 (color, white balance, and image processing settings 1)

    red camera icon page 12 : color, white balance and image processing settings 1

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    • Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
    • Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
    • White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
    DRO

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colors to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to your RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to color.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambiance.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

    This functionality can be changed:

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference between light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image that retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: It creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    You can customize the picture settings by adjusting picture profile items such as Gamma and Detail. These settings apply to both RAW files and video, so you’ll need to change them back, or select the appropriate setting when switching between still shooting and video.

    When setting this up, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while checking the picture on the screen.

    Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

    Select the item to change using the up/down sides of the control wheel.

    Select the desired value using the up/down sides of the control wheel and press the button in the center.

    The default settings PP1 through PP7 for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting conditions.

    • PP1: Example setting using a standard Movie gamma.
    • PP2: Example setting using the standard Sony Still gamma.
    • PP3: Example setting of natural color tone using the ITU709 gamma.
    • PP4: Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
    • PP5: Example setting using Cine 1 gamma.
    • PP6: Example setting using Cine2 gamma.
    • PP7: Example setting using  S-Log2 gamma.

    It’s possible to adjust settings and create your own picture profile.

    Black Level

    Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

    Gamma

    Selects a gamma curve. These are the curves available:

    • Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
    • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
    • Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
    • Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
    • Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and [Cine2] and strengthens gradation in black.
    • Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in dark parts is lower and the contrast in bright parts is higher than for Movie.
    • ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU-709.ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2].
    • S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    Black Gamma

    Corrects gamma in low-intensity areas.

    • Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
    • Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
    Knee

    Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

    Mode

    Selects auto/manual settings.

    • Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
    • Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
    Auto Set

    Settings when Auto is selected.

    • Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
    • Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
    • Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected.
    • Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
    Color Mode

    Sets type and level of colors.

    • Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
    • Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
    • Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].
    • Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU-709 gamma)ITU709
    • Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU-709 standard (when combined with ITU-709 gamma)
    • Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
    • S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
    Saturation

    Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

    Color Phase

    Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

    Color Depth

    Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set Color Mode to Black & White.

    • [R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
    • [G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
    • [B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
    • [C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
    • [M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
    • [Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
    Detail

    Add detail.

    Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)

    Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.

    • Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
    • V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
    • B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
    • Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
    • Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
    • Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
    Copy

    Copies the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.

    Reset

    Resets the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13 of 15 (color, white balance, and image processing settings 2)

    red camera icon page 13 : color, white balance and image processing settings 2

    Shutter AWB Lock

    If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 14 of 15 (Focus assist settings)

    red camera icon page 14 Focus assist settings

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif. Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Initial Focus Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

    Full-frame shooting:

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.

    APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.
    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    1. Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
    2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
    3. Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking Settings
    Peaking Level

    Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.

    You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.

    Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.

    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 15 of 15 (shooting assist menu)

    red camera icon page 15 Shooting Assist

    Anti-Flicker Shoot.

    Reduces banding effects when shooting with the electronic shutter or EFCS with flash or with artificial light indoors.

    Face Registration

    Register faces here by taking an image of that face. These can then be set according to your preferred priority.

    Regist. Face Priority

    You can decide which face will be first to be focussed on when face detection is turned on.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon – page 1 of 11 (Movie settings page 1)

    purple movie icon page 1 (Movie settings page 1)

    Exposure Mode (Movie)

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    S&Q Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD or AVCHD. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4.  You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    Record Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of the recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p/25p: 30p 60M/25p 60Mbps or 30p 100M/25p 100Mbps.
    • 24p: 24p 60Mbps or 24p 100Mbps if your camera is set to NTSC

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
    • 30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
    • 60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
    • 24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
    • 60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
    • 24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow-motion movie on the Sony A7r IV:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/S&Q Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].

    Proxy Recording
    This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon – page 2 of 11 (Movie settings page 2)

    purple movie icon page 2 (movie settings 2)

    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Initial Focus Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when using the Focus Magnifier function. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

    Full-frame shooting:

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.

    APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.
    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon – page 3 of 11 (movie settings page 3)

    purple movie icon page 3 movie settings page 3

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
    • During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.
    Audio Out Timing

    You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

    • Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
    • Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Video Light Mode

    Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

    • Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
    • REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
    • REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
    • Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

    MENU – Purple Movie  Icon – page 4 of 11 (Movie settings page 4)

    purple movie icon page 4 movie settings page 4

    Movie w/ shutter

    You can map the movie recording function to the shutter button.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon – page 5 of 11 (shutter and steady shot settings)

    purple movie icon page 5 (shutter and steady shot settings)

    Silent Shooting

    Select here if you want to use the Electronic or Mechanical shutter. There is also an auto option that switches from mechanical to electronic shutter if a flash is detected.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Release without lens

    It makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the camera. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function. For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    SteadyShot Settings

    If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A7r IV body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.

    • Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
    • Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon – page 6 of 11 (zoom settings)

    purple movie icon page 6 zoom settings

    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom function on or off.

    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

    Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the camera uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    Zoom ring rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon – page 7 of 11 (display and auto review settings page 1)

    purple movie icon page 7 display and auto review settings page 1

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Finder Frame Rate

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    • 120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
    • 60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
    Zebra setting

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100. The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded in the resulting image. I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line (movie mode)

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon- page 8 of 11 (display and auto review settings page 2)

    purple movie icon page 8 display and auto review settings page 2

    Live View Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality. When u use a flash in a studio situation, you will want to turn this off. Setting it to ON also reduces the EVF refresh rate from 120fps to 60fps.

    Cont. Shoot. Length

    This will show you how many shots you have left on your SD card on the screen. You can select to always have this info displayed, only during shooting or turn it off.

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon- page 9 of 11 (custom operations settings page 1)

    purple movie icon page 9 custom operations settings page 1

     

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)/Custom Key(Movie)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, I assign [Eye AF] to [AF-ON] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Learn how to do this here:

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3
    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    My dial Settings

    You can assign the desired functions to the control dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of settings as My Dial settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered My Dial settings by pressing the custom key you assigned in advance.

    Registering functions to “My Dial”

    Register the functions that you want to assign to the control dial and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].

    1. MENU – Camera Settings2 – My Dial Settings.
    2. Select a dial or wheel for My Dial 1, and press the center of the control wheel.
    3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
      • Select “–” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.
    4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in My Dial 1 by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select OK. The settings for My Dial 1 will be registered.
      • If you want to register My Dial 2 and My Dial 3 as well, follow the same procedure as described above.
    Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

    Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

    1. MENU – Camera Settings2  – Custom Key or Movie Custom Key – Select the key that you want to use to recall “My Dial.”
    2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”
    Menu item details

    My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold: While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in My Dial Settings are assigned to the dial/wheel.

    My Dial 1-2-3 : Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: Normal function – Function of My Dial 1 – Function of My Dial 2 – Function of My Dial 3 – Normal function.

    Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3: The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again to return to the normal function.

    Shooting while switching “My Dial”

    During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning the control dial/control wheel.

    In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to “My Dial,” and [My Dial 1-2-3] is assigned to the C1 (Custom 1) button.

    1. The icons shown below are displayed in the lower part of the screen. Press the C1 (Custom1) button. The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.
    2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, and turn the control dial to set the aperture value.
    3. Press the C1 button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.
    4. Turn the control wheel to set the shutter speed, and turn the control dial to set [White Balance].
    5. Press the C1 button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
    6. Press the shutter button to shoot.
    Dial Setup

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon- page 10 of 11 (custom operations settings page 2)

    purple movie icon page 10 Custom operations settings page 2

    Av/Tv Rotate

    Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.

    Dial Ev Comp

    You can compensate for the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    Function Ring(Lens)

    You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens:

    • power-assisted focusing (power focus).
    • switching the angle of view between full-frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with compatible lenses).
    Func. of Touch Oper.

    Select the functionality of the touch screen. There are two choices:

    1. Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
    2. Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.
    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the Movie button.

    Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

    Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to the “Movie/S&Q Motion” mode.

    Lock Operation Parts

    You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

    MENU – Purple Movie Icon- page 11 of 11 (custom operations settings page 3)

    purple movie icon page 11 MENU → Purple Movie Icon→ page 10 of 11 (custom operations settings page 3)

    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the A7r IV produces a sound or not in silent mode with the electronic shutter.

    MENU – Network settings- page 1 of 3

    network settings page 1

    Send To Smartphone Func.

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A6400 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6400 screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    FTP Transfer Func.
    You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP servers is required.
    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network. 

    Ctrl w/ smartphone

    By connecting the camera to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

    Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

    PC Remote Function

    You can remotely control the camera with a high degree of freedom suited to professional sites via the PC app “Remote Camera Tool”. You can also remotely control an Ethernet-connected camera or multiple cameras from this application. In addition, a remote control is possible even during FTP transfer, which achieves even higher shooting efficiency.

    MENU – Network settings- page 2 of 3

    network settings page 2

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset on some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A9.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony A9 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    Bluetooth Settings.

    Controls the settings for connecting the Sony A9 to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Location Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony A9, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    1. Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the Sony A9and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
    2. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
    3. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
    4. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    5. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    6. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. The pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    7. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].

    (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking it with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A7r IV using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

    You can easily use the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander from Sony called the RMT-P1BT.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A7r IV is yours in particular situations.

    MENU – Network settings- page 3 of 3

    network settings page 3

    Import Root Certificate

    Import a root certificate from your memory card here.

    Security(IPSEC)

    The IP security (IPSec) is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard suite of protocols between 2 communication points across the IP network that provide data authentication, integrity, and confidentiality. It also defines the encrypted, decrypted and authenticated packets. You can sit this up for a secure network connection with the Sony A7rm4

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1 of 4

    Playback settings page 1

    Protect

    Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

    Rating

    Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key)

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – playback options – page 2 of 4

    Playback settings page 2

    Copy

    You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select PB Media] to a memory card in another slot.

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First, shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Init. Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Pos.

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either the image center or the focus position.

    continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

    Cont. PB for Interval

    You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge. You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

    MENU – playback options – page 3 of 4

    Playback settings page 3

    PB Speed for Interval

    Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for the interval).

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Select Playback Media

    Select what SD card slot will be used when you press playback. 

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display as Group

    You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.

    MENU – playback options – page 4 of 4

    Playback settings page 4

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Image Jump Setting

    Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. You can quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

    Select Dial

    Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.

    Image Jump Method

    Sets the type of images to be played back with Image Jump.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 1 of 7

    Camera setup page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to your liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded videos or demos.

    Delete confirm.

    You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 2 of 7

    Camera setup page 2

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality to High or Standard. When High is selected, battery consumption will be higher, and your camera will also heat up faster.

    Pwr Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    Auto Pwr OFF Temp. 

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touchpad operations.”

    • Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • TouchPad Only: Activates only the touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 3 of 7

    Camera setup page 3

    Touch Panel/pad

    Selects whether to activate touch panel operation when shooting with the monitor, or touchpad operation when shooting with the viewfinder.

    Touch Panel+Pad
      : Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    Touch Panel Only
      : Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    TouchPad Only
      : Activates only the touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    Demo Mode

    For display purposes in stores only.

    TouchPad Settings

    You can adjust settings related to touchpad operations during viewfinder shooting.

    • Operation in V Orien.: Sets whether to enable touchpad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically-oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
    • Touch Pos. Mode: Sets, whether to move the focusing frame to the position, touched on the screen, or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement.
    • Operation Area: Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for the synchronization of the video in post-production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    IR Remote CTRL

    You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 4 of 7

    Camera setup page 4

    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs video in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    • Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
    USB LUN Setting

    It improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A7r IV for the first time.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 5 of 7

    Camera setup page 5

    Area Setting

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    IPTC information

    he IPTC Photo Metadata standard is the most widely used standard because of its universal acceptance among photographers, distributors, news organizations, archivists, and developers. The schema defines metadata structure, properties, and fields so that images are optimally described and easily accessed later.

    You can write IPTC information when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the dedicated software and write the information to a memory card beforehand.

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Write Serial Number

    Writes the camera’s serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the camera for a stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    Rec. Media Settings

    Selects the memory card slot on which to record. Slot 1 is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1. To record the same image to two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/movie), use Recording Mode.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 6 of 7

    Camera setup page 6

    File/Folder Settings (stills)

    Change the file and folder destination here.

    File Settings (video)

    Change the destination for video files here.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)/

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your Sony A9 and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 7 of 7

    Camera setup page 7

    Save/Load Settings

    Save or load the settings you have previously made on this or another A7RM4

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens are running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    MENU – My menu settings

    my menu settings tab

    This is new functionality not previously seen on any Sony Ax camera. It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.

    Add Item

    You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom-built menu page.

    Sort Item

    This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

    Delete Item

    Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

    Delete Page

    Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

    Delete All

    Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

    Dealing with specific focussing scenarios

    When shooting typical moving subjects using the α7rm3 (ILCE-7rm3), the following settings are recommended by default.

    Recommended default settings

    Focus Mode AF-C Focus mode dial
    Focus Area * Flexible Spot: M [] 4 / 13 (AF1)
    Priority Set in AF-C Balanced Emphasis [] 4 / 13 (AF1)
    AF Track Sens * 3 (Standard) [] 5 / 13 (AF2)
    Swt. V/H AF Area AF Point Only [] 4 / 13 (AF1)

    * Recommended settings differ depending on the subject.

    Focus Mode: AF-C

    When set to the AF-C (Continuous AF) mode, the camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down.

    Focus Area: Flexible Spot M

    When set to the Flexible Spot, the camera allows you to move the focusing frame to the desired point on the screen and focus on a small subject in a narrow area. The size of the focusing frame can be selected. The medium size M is recommended for general use.

    • Other settings

     Wide: Automatically focuses on a subject across the entire screen.

     Zone: After the user selects a focus zone on the monitor, the camera will automatically select the focus points.

     Center: Focuses automatically on the subject in the center of the image.

     Expand Flexible Spot: If the camera cannot focus on a single selected point, it flexibly uses focus points around the spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.

    Priority Set in AF-C: Balanced Emphasis

    Regarding whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus, shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

    AF Track Sens: 3 (Standard)

    When set to 5 (Responsive), the camera focuses responsively on subjects at different distances.

    When set to 1 (Locked on), the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject even when other objects pass in front of the subject.

    Standard 3 is recommended for general use. 

    Difference between [1 (Locked on)] when using AF tracking sensitivity and [Lock-on AF]

    [1 (Locked on)] is one of the settings in AF Track Sens (AF tracking sensitivity). In this setting, the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject when other objects pass in front of the subject.

    On the other hand, the [Lock-on AF] and [Center Lock-on AF] functions on this camera allow the camera to shift the focusing frame in accordance with the subject’s movement.

    Although these names are similar, their functions are different. Please be sure to distinguish between them

    Swt. V/H AF Area: AF Point only

    Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus Area] is fixed.

    • Other settings

    Off: Does not switch the [Focus Area] or the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).

    AF Point AF Area: Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).

    Recommended autofocus settings chart for each subject

    Star eater issue solution

    All Sony A7 and A9 series cameras have an issue with long exposures that specifically impacts those of us who enjoy starscape photography.

    This type of photography, where you attempt to capture the night sky, typically involves exposures longer than 4 seconds where Sony’s in-body RAW cooking adds a type of noise reduction to your image. Bas

    As a result, the smallest stars in the sky might turn out less bright or even disappear because your camera believes it to be noise.

    The following technique won’t work for bulb exposure (longer than 30 seconds) but will get you better results between 30 seconds and 4 seconds (where the noise reduction automatically kicks in. It’s a bit counter-intuitive, but setting your camera to continuous high or low drive mode will ensure that this excessive noise reduction won’t be triggered. The only downside is that, since you’re in continuous drive mode, the camera will only save your images as a 12-bit file (instead of 14 bit when in single). This may impact the dynamic range of your image, and add some noise of course.

    Other general settings tips

    Back Button focus

    Back Button focus

    I personally don’t like back button focus, but you might. This is disengaging the shutter button from autofocus functionality. Instead, this is assigned to a button (most of the time the AF ON button on the back). It’s correctly configured by default, but we do need to adjust the “Shutter Release” button so that it too no longer controls your autofocus system. To do this, jump into the Red Camera Menu and go to  Page 6. Adjust “AF w/ shutter” to “Off”.

    Minimum shutter speed with auto ISO

    A very important tweak can be found in the Exposure Menu ( red camera icon, page 9 of 14). It’s called ISO Auto minimum shutter speed and allows you to have the ability to set the minimum shutter speed you are willing to let your camera shoot at before the Auto ISO feature engages. This can be very handy for street photographers who have to deal with ever-changing lighting situations. By setting your ISO AUTO Min. SS to 1/250 second, you are telling your camera that if your shutter speed doesn’t drop below 1/250h of a second, your ISO should stay at base ISO (for maximum quality). If the light changes and it becomes darker suddenly, the camera will raise the ISO to maintain that minimum shutter speed.

    Not just street photographers but also bird and action photographers (set to 1/1000 or 1/2000 second to freeze motion) can use this feature to make sure that their images are not impacted by a loss of sharpness due to movement of your subject. Take a look at the table above for general settings first!

    Minimum shutter speed with auto ISO

    Using gridlines to improve your compositions

    Using gridlines is a great way to improve your compositions. You can select Rule of 3rds, Square Grid or Diagonal Square Grid. The first is ideal for landscapes, you can try the latter two if you are a portrait photographer and check if it helps you to both keep things level and get a more dynamic image.

    Gridline settings can be found in the purple camera icon menu (Display/Auto Review 1), page 6 of 9. It’s also available for movie mode.

    grid lines

    Manual focussing aides

    If you often shoot manual lenses or prefer switching to manual focus, there are two important focusing aides that you should be aware of. These are focus magnification and focus peaking.

    Focus magnification is quite straightforward when MF (or DMF) is selected, your camera will magnify  x1 or x7.8 a selectable portion of your image so you can more clearly view where your focus lies. You can move this selection by simply moving the joystick.

    Focus magifier and focus peaking

    Focus Peaking works alongside focus magnification or separately, as you choose. I use both at the same time. As you turn the MF ring on your lens, you’ll see a color ‘noise’  over your image as things become sharp, making it easy to know when you are close to perfect focus. For the best results, set:

    • peaking display: ON
    • Peaking Level: Mid
    • Peaking Color: Red

    Both these functions can be found in the camera settings (red camera icon) page 13 of 14.focus peaking level

    Formatting and preventing loss of data

    Accidentally formatting your SD card in the A7rIV will result in a total loss of all data. Nothing will be coverable due to the fact that Sony decided to go for a full format (overwriting with zeros) when formatting. This is why for important shoots (and certainly when you’re new to the camera) I recommend setting the camera up so that anything that is captured to Card 1  automatically gets copied to Card 2.

    You’ll need to go to Rec. Media Settings in the Setup menu (briefcase) page 6 of 7. You’ll need to set it to Simulate. (picture) to do this.

    Hybrid Log Gamma

    The a7R IV can capture Hybrid Log-Gamma footage, both for video and stills. This is a broadcast standard designed to display high dynamic range content. Sony cameras have the tendency to slightly underexpose, but HLG Mode can give you perfect Raw exposure by using a method called ETTR (Expose To The Right). It saves you from underexposing unnecessarily (thereby supplying the sensor with as much light as it can tolerate), and reduces the degree to which you’ll need to pull shadows or boost exposure in post. In other words, your resulting image will contain less noise after processing.

    Procedure:

    1. Set one of your Picture Profiles to use ‘HLG’ for the gamma setting,
    2. enable Zebra highlight warnings and set the Zebra level to 100+.
    3. Increase your exposure until the moment you first see Zebra warnings.

    These settings, where you first see a hint of Zebra warnings, is your optimal Raw file exposure. It will be the brightest possible, but counterintuitively (since you’re seeing the warnings), all highlights you want to capture won’t be clipped.

    Using Sony AF Area registration to switch from spot to 9 point group focus (like Nikon)

    One of the coolest things that Nikon cameras do is allow you to instantly switch from spot to 9 point group focus with your middle finger on your right hand. I miss that with Sony. I found this trick on how to do the same thing with the A7rm3 with any two focus area settings.

    Register a focus area and switch between 2 focus areas using a custom button:
    1. Go to the AF3 Menu and enable ‘AF Area Regist.”. This allows you to register a focus area by long press,g the Fn button on the shooting screen. The registered focus area can be recalled with the custom key.

    Area Regis.

    2. In the normal shooting screen, the Lock-on AF (Expand Flexible spot) is great for moving subjects, but when the movement becomes too erratic, I like to switch to Lock-on AF Wide. This is the one we are going to register as ‘AF Area Regist.’.

    3. Now long-press the FN key until you see on the screen that the camera has ‘registered the focus area’.

    4. Now we need to recall this function with the single touch of a custom button. We have to go to Custom operation 1 page 8/9 in order to set up the Custom Key(Shoot.) Menu to do this. We’ll assign this to the ‘Custom Button 3’ but you can, of course, choose another button.

    Custom button 3

    We have 2 options here: we can hold the custom button to recall that registered focus area or simple press this custom button once to toggle between the two AF areas. The latter works best for me, but you might feel different.

    5. Now if you press your preferred custom button, you’ll immediately go to ‘Lock On: AF Wide’. Press this button again and you go back to ‘expand flexible spot.

    This method allows us to quickly cycle between any two AF areas using the registered focus area and assigning a custom button toggle between the two!

  • Panasonic Lumix S1H configurations tips and suggestions

    Panasonic Lumix S1H configurations tips and suggestions

    Introduction

    Thanks for visiting my Panasonic Lumix S1H advanced manual with tips and techniques. This handbook commences from your camera Menu and goes through all aspects of this exciting video camera. I am aware there is quite a lot of information  here, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise. If you’re looking for the S1r guide by the way, you can find it here and the S1 here.

    Key Features

    • 24MP Live CMOS sensor
    • 3.68M-dot electronic viewfinder w/ 0.83x equivalent magnification
    • 1.04M-dot 3″ articulating touchscreen display
    • 5-axis in-body image stabilization with Dual I.S. 2 (CIPA rated 6.5 stops)
    • 20 fps burst w/continuous AF using the e-shutter (for ~50 frames)
    • 9 fps burst w/continuous AF using mechanical shutter (for 600 frames)
    • 80MP Raw and/or JPEG files using High-Resolution mode
    • video recording in 6K / 24p (in format 3: 2) or 5,9K / 30p (in format 16: 9)
    • C4K / 4K  in 60p in 10 bits
    • V-Log / V-Gamut with a dynamic range of 14 stops
    • compatible with the V-Log format recorded by a VariCam or the V-Log L recorded by the LUMIX GH5 / GH5S
    • Magnesium body designed to be dust/weather-sealed
    • Dual UHS-II card slots supporting new high-speed ‘V’-rated cards
    • Assortment of 4K and 6K Photo modes and in-camera focus stacking
    • USB charge and power capability
    • Top plate LCD
    • AF joystick
    • Wi-Fi Bluetooth

    I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix S1H you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.

    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (photo settings)

    MENU – photo settings page 1 of 7 (image quality settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 1

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the Panasonic S1H takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this Lumix, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic S1H measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    • Highlight weighted: Optimise exposure of the subject for highlighted areas of the frae Address measure the whole frame evenly.
    Aspect Ratio

    You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

    An full frame sensor camera has a native aspect ratio of 3:2. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the Panasonic S1H Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 3:2 sensor retained.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 3:2: native sensor ratio
    • 4:3: the ratio used in the Panasonic micro-four-thirds cameras.
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
    • 65:42: super wide crop for a panorama effect
    • 2:1: the more the better 🙂
    Picture Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    If you only shoot in RAW, the image on the rear screen when reviewing the images are of a very low quality. When you import to the computer they are fine but it might be better to shoot both RAW and JPEG.

    Picture Size

    Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have..

    The Panasonic S1H also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info).  Thanks to  in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

    Large: 46,5 MP 8368×5584 (for printing up to 41×29″)

    Medium: 23,5 MP 5952×3968 (for printing up to A2 16×20″)

    Small 12 MP 4272×2848 (for printing up to A2 16×20″)

    HLG Photo

    HLG Photo allows images to be shot with a wider dynamic range. By reproducing both glaring lights and dark shadows that are likely to be overexposed or underexposed, the Lumix S achieves rich, precise color expression as close as possible to visual memory.

    HLG Photos are produced as an HSP file. The user can play back these vibrant images on the latest Panasonic HLG-compliant 4KTV via HDMI cable connection or other HLG-compliant devices. It is also ideal for photographers’ photo presentations.

    High Resolution Mode

    High resolution Mode menu

    Ah yes, High Resolution Mode. Probably one of the most talked about new camera features of the last few years. You’ll definitely try it once, but you’ll be hard-pressed to find a real use for it in day to day shooting. What happens in High resolution mode is that the Panasonic S1H uses the stabilised sensor to make two exposures of the same scene with a one pixel difference (effectively moving the sensor by a pixel in the second capture). This doubles the resolution of your output file. This will really only work in still scenes where there is absolutely no movement, and it is best to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.

    It is a quite simple process:

    1. Press up/down to select Start, and press MENU/SET. If there is any camera shake, the High-Res Mode icon will flash, telling you it is not possible to make a high res image.
    2. Decide on the composition, and perform recording. The screen will go dark during recording. The recording state indicator (red) will flash. Do not move the camera while the indicator is flashing. Recording will finish automatically. When the recording has finished, the Lumix S1H will combine the pictures, so it will not be able to perform the next recording for a while.
    3. Press Fn2 to end High-Res Mode.

    There is a new Mode 2, which tries to amend movement in the high res mode. This works great for leaves of trees and even water.

    Long Exposure NR

    The Panasonic S1H will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

    MENU – photo settings page 2 of 7 (image quality settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 2

    ISO Sensitivity

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 100 and upper limit to 6400, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Min. Shtr Speed

    A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic S1H is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.

    Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available.  You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.

    i. Dynamic Range

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the Panasonic S1H adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

    There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

    Vignetting Comp.

    All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic Lumix S1H will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

    Filter Settings

    The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic S1H up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

    If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.Creative Control mode

    And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

    These are all the image effects available:

    • Expressive
    • High Key
    • Monochrome
    • Silky Monochrome
    • Cross Process
    • Bleach Bypass
    • Fantasy
    • Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
    • Retro
    • Low Key
    • Dynamic Monochrome
    • Impressive Art
    • Toy Effect
    • Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
    • Star Filter
    • Old Days
    • Sepia
    • Rough Monochrome
    • High Dynamic
    • Toy Pop
    • Soft Focus
    • One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 3 of 7 (focus settings)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 3

    AF Custom Setting (Photo)

    You can customise the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFF or AFC.

    There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:

    • Set 1: This is a basic general purpose setting.
    • Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
    • Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
    • Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.

    There are three areas in which these presets can tweaked according to your preferences:

    • AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to movement of your subject.
    • AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
    • Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
    AF Assist light

    AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the Panasonic S1H to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

    Focus Peaking

    In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

    1-Area AF moving speed

    This changes the speed of the autofocus point selection so that it’s easier to move your single autofocus point across the frame.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 4 of 7 (flash settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 4

    Flash Mode

    You’ll need to override iAuto and set your S1H to P, A, S or M in order to have these options.

    Forced Flash On: The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.

    Slow Sync: when taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background landscape will appear brighter.

    Forced Flash Off: The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.

    2nd Curtain Synchro: activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.

    Firing Mode

    Select whether to set the flash output automatically (TTL) or manually.

    Firing mode cannot be set when using a flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:optional). It can be set only when using an external flash that does not use a battery (supplied with some models of Panasonic digital cameras).

    Flash Adjust

    djust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed plus or minus 3EV.

    Flash Synchro

    you can Synchronise the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation.

    Manual Flash adjust

    Adjust the flash output manually on the flash or not.

    Auto Exposure comp.

    The Panasonic S1H automatically optimizes the flash output for the Exposure Compensation value.

    Red-eye removal

    If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the Lumix will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

    Wireless

    Flashes compatible with this camera (DMW-FL580L (DC-G9)/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) come with the wireless recording function. You’ll need a hotshoe trigger like this to use this functionality. There is no built-in trigger in case you’re wondering.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 5 of 7 (Flash settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 5

    Wireless channel

    With this function, you can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash attached to the hot shoe of the Panasonic S1H.

    Wireless FP

    During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high speed repetition of flash firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed.

    Communication Light

    Setting the output of communication light.

    Wireless setup

    Set up different groups  and Flash modes for each group for ultimate control when using multiple flashes.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 6 of 7 (Other Photo settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 6

    Bracketing

    The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

    Possible bracket types:

    • Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
    • Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
    • Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic S1H will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
    • White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix S1H will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
    • White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
    Silent Mode

    Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic S1H.

    Image Stabilizer

    The Panasonic Lumix S1H has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the Lumix S1H is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

    It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case).  You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

    There is also a new Auto mode where camera shake is corrected for up/down and left/right movement. This auto mode detects the panning direction automatically.

    Burst Shot 1 Setting

    The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    Burst Shot 2 Setting

    You can assign any of these presets to 1 or 2 on the mode dial of the Panasonic Lumix S1H.

    Shutter Type

    You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic S1H decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.

    • AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
    • MECH: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
    • EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
    • ELEC. : Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
    • ELEC.+NR: uses a black frame to apply noise reduction

    Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

    Shutter Delay

    To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

    Ex. Tele Conv.

    You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 7 of 7 (Other Photo settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 7

    Time Lapse/Animation

    You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie or stop motion/animation. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:

    time lapse

    You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.

    Time Lapse:
    1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
    2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    Stop motion/Animation
    1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
    2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    5. move the subject per frame
    6. press the folder menu to end the recording
    Self Timer

    The self timer function is self explanatory.  If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    Flicker Decrease

    The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your photos. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

    6K/4K Photo

    6K/4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps (60fps for 4K mode). Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K/6K video technology to shoot 18 MP image at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

    There are three 6K Photo Modes, 6K Burst, 6K Burst (S/S) and 6K Pre-Burst. These modes determine at how and when the footage will be recorded.

    • In 6K Burst mode the Panasonic S1H shoots 6K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
    • In 6K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
    • 6K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second prior to you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.

    4K is the same, except it allows you to go up to 60 frames per second.

    Extracting stills from the 6K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:

    1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 6K Photo Mode are marked with the 6K Photo icon to make the easy to identify.
      Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
    2.  If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
    3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
    4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 6K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.

    it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 6K movie. To do this:

    1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
    2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
    3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
    Post Focus

    Post focus means controlling your focus point afterwards. This might sound like a scifi concept, but it’s quite simple if you know what is really happening. The Panasonic S1H performs a burst of shots ( same picture quality and system as the fore-mentioned 6K/4K photo recording) while automatically shifting the focus to different areas. After the recording, you can select your desired focus point from the list of 30(6K) or 60(4K) per second captures. It works best with scenes with little to no movement, as having someone move around would of course add another degree of shifting focus points to the mix.

    In the same way, focus stacking can be achieved. Focus stacking is a method of making an images that is sharp across the frame. By recording the same scene multiple times with different focus points and later on combining all these images, you can get an image that is sharp across the frame. This is a technique often used in macro photography where your depth of field is very shallow (only a small part, where focus lies, is sharp) because of the nature of shooting at close distances. But it can also be used for other types of photography like landscapes.

    It’s recommended to use a very fast SD card in order to achieve these high frame rates by the way.

    You’ll need to set your drive mode dial to this setting:

    Post Focus/ Focus stacking

    Now press the shutter button halfway so the Lumix can detect the possible focus areas, and then fully press the shooter to record the scene in burst mode (which is actually video as I mentioned earlier).

    For post focus:

    Select your series of images you just captured, there is an icon that reassures you this is a batch of images to avoid any confusion:

    post focus icon

    Once selected, all you need to do is use the touch screen to select the focus point you desire. And now touch this icon to save:

    save post focus image

    The Focus stacking function can be performed in-camera. This methods also starts with selecting the series of images you just captured. Then you press the FN1 button and you’ll be in the focus stacking menu. There are two types of merging, Auto and range. Auto automatically selects the best images to merge into a more sharp composite image, and Range allows you to select a specified focus range with your finger on the touch screen. When you have done this, touch the icon on the bottom right of the screen and the Lumix S1H will save the resulting composite image with the EXIF data from the closest focussed image.

    Self Timer

    The self timer function is self explanatory.  If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    self timer

    In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    MENU – Video Menu- page 1 of 7 (also called Video Image Quality 1)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 1

    Exposure Mode

    Switch your Panasonic S1H to P, A, S or M. for full control over shutter speed, Iso and aperture.

    Photo Style

    You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the S1. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic S1H measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    • Highlight weighted: Optimise exposure of the subject for highlighted areas of the frae Address measure the whole frame evenly.
    ISO sensitivity (video)

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 100 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Flicker Decrease

    The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

    i. Dynamic

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Panasonic S1H will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

    Shading Comp.

    All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic S1H will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

    MENU -Video Menu- page 2 of 7 (also called Video Image Quality 2)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 2

    Filter Settings

    The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic Lumix S1H up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

    If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.Creative Control mode

    And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

    These are all the image effects available:

    • Expressive
    • High Key
    • Monochrome
    • Silky Monochrome
    • Cross Process
    • Bleach Bypass
    • Fantasy
    • Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
    • Retro
    • Low Key
    • Dynamic Monochrome
    • Impressive Art
    • Toy Effect
    • Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
    • Star Filter
    • Old Days
    • Sepia
    • Rough Monochrome
    • High Dynamic
    • Toy Pop
    • Soft Focus
    • One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
    Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M

    Sets auto exposure settings for video in these modes.

    CreativeVideo combined set

    As with photography, aperture and shutter control dramatically change the way video looks.

    A film-maker aiming for a particular look will select an f-stop giving the required depth of field, or a shutter speed portraying sharp, clean movement, or maybe a soft motion-blur effect. The Hybrid camera allows such control during video mode, but there are limitations. Because the native frame rate of video is 25fps, the slowest shutter speed available is 1/25th sec.

    The rule of thumb for choosing shutter speed is based on the ‘shutter angle’ used in cinemas for projecting film. Until very recently, this was 180 degrees; it essentially means each frame is flashed twice on screen, which is one reason why film looks as it does in cinemas. If you are keen for a ‘cinematic’ look, not only should you shoot at 24fps, but also keep your shutter at 1/48th sec – on a DSLR/DSLM, the closest to this is 1/50thsec.

    You can use this ‘doubling rule’ when shooting at 25 or 50fps, but if you want to try a faster shutter for sharper movement capture, simply experiment! What works best for you? Just be aware that to achieve a bright enough exposure when sticking to a minimum 1/50th sec shutter speed, you may need to select a higher ISO or, better still, use very fast lenses.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 3 of 7  (Image Format settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 3

    Rec Quality
    MP4:
    • 4K, 60p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 150Mbps, LPCM
    • 4K, 30p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 1O0Mbps, LPCM
    • 4K, 24p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 1O0Mbps, LPCM
    • FHD, 60p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 28Mbps, AAC
    • FHD, 30p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 20Mbps, AAC
    High Speed Video
    • 180/30p FHD
    • 120/30p FHD
    • 60/30p 4K
    • 48/23,98p 4K
    Rec File Format

    MP4 or AVHCD.

    Luminance Level

    Select the luminance range to match the use of video.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 4 of 7 (focus settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 4

    AF Custom Setting (Video)

    You can customise the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFF or AFC.

    There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:

    • Set 1: This is a basic general purpose setting.
    • Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
    • Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
    • Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.

    There are three areas in which these presets can tweaked according to your preferences:

    • AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to movement of your subject.
    • AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
    • Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
    Continuous AF

    Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

    AFS/AFF/AFC:
    • On: The S1H automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
    • Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
    MF

    You can use manual focus.

    Focus Peaking

    Turn on Focus Peaking when in Manual Focus. Focus Peaking helps you figure out where fine focus lies thanks to a type of coloured grain or noise in those areas.

    1-Area AF moving speed

    This changes the speed of the autofocus point selection so that it’s easier to move your single autofocus point across the frame.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 5 of 7 (audio settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 5

    Sound Rec Level Disp.

    Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

    Sound Rec Level Adj.

    Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

    Sound Rec Level Limiter

    The Panasonic Lumix S1H adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.

    Wind Noise Canceller

    This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

    Mic Socket

    Selects which input is used for the mic socket.

    Special Mic.

    Only available only when you use an external stereo shotgun microphone like the Panasonic DMW-MS2. You have a few options on how to use a microphone like this:

    • Stereo: Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
    • Lens Auto: Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according to the angle of view of the lens.
    • Shotgun: Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and surrounding noise.
    • S.Shotgun: Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of SHOTGUN.
    • Manual: Allows recording within the range you set manually.
    XLR mic adapter setting

    For use withe the Panasonic DMW-XLR1 XLR Microphone Adapter.

    Sound Output

    You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.

    You can switch the sound output:

    • Realtime: Actual sound without time lag. It can be different to the audio recorded in the movie.
    • Rec Sound: Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures. The audio may be output slower than the actual audio. If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to this.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 6 of 7 (Monitor and display settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 6

    HDMI Rec Output

    Sets the picture quality for the HDMI output. Bit Mode, Info Display and 4K down convert are available.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 7 of 7 (other video settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 7

    Image stabiliser

    Image sensor stabilisation can permanently on or off for video, as well as a type of electronic stabilisation. Boost IS will give you the maximum stabilisation and the cost of some image quality.

    Image Area of Video

    You can choose between the full sensor surface, an APS-C size sensor space when using an APS-C sensor. It’s also possible to close a pixel by pixel surface.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 1 of 9 (image quality settings)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 1

    Photo style settings

    It’s now possible to show or hide certain photo styles according to your own preferences.  There are now also up to ten custom photo styles that you can tweak according to your own preferences or even start from scratch.

    You can now also and ISO sensitivity and white balance into a custom profile in the “My Photo Style Settings” tab. So you can build a custom look that includes these settings.

    ISO Increments

    Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

    Extended ISO

    ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

    Exposure Offset Adjust.

    Adjust what the Panasonic S1H determines to be a good exposure by plus or minus 1 EV. This can be changed for all the metering modes being Multi Metering, Center Weighted, Spot and Highlight Weighted.

    Color Space

    Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

    Exposure Comp. Reset

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 2 of 9 (focus and shutter settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 2

    Focus/Shutter priority

    Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.

    Focus Switching for Vert / Hor

    Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).

    AF/AE Lock Hold

    When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

    AF+MF

    When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

    MF Assist

    Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic S1.

    MF assist settings

    MF Guide

    Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display. And also your focus distance in feet or meter.

    Focus ring Lock

    Locks the focus ring so you won’t accidentally change focus during shooting.

    Show/Hide AF mode

    Allows you to select whether you’ll see the AF mode selected on your screen or EVF. If you don’t use certain focus modes, you can disable them her so they won’t show up in the navigation window.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 3 of 9 (focus and shutter settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 3

    Pinpoint AF Setting

    The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.

    AF-point Scope Setting

    The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.

    Shutter AF

    Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

    Half Press Release

    The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

    Quick AF

    As long as the camera is held steady, the Panasonic S1H will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

    Eye Sensor AF

    The Panasonic S1H wil automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

    Loop Movement Focus Frame

    When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

    AFC start point

    Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 4 of 9 (operation settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 4

    Q.MENU

    In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

    You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.

    1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
    2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
    3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
    4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
    5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
    Touch Settings

    Enables/disables the Touch operation.

    • Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
    • Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
    • Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
    • Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
    Lock lever Setting

    You can control which functionality will be locked when you use the lock lever on the back of the camera body. Cursor, Joystick, touch screen, dial and DISP button are selectable.

    Fn Button Set

    You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.

    1. Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
    2. Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
    FN Lever Setting

    You are also free to assign any function to the FN lever using the same method as Fn Button set.

    WB/ISO/Expo button

    Select the functionality of these buttons.

    Iso Displayed settings

    Customise the Iso settings on the display.

    Exposure comp Display. setting

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the Panasonic S1H is turned off.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 5 of 9 (operation settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 5

    Dial Set.

    Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

    Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

    Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

    Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

    Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

    Joystick Setting

    The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor buttons MENU/SET button.

    Illuminate button

    Sets the functionality of the illuminated button.

    ON1: activate illuminated buttons constantly.

    ON2: button is illuminated only when the backlight button of the Status-LCD is pressed.

    OFF: the illuminated buttons are turned off permanently.

    Video Rec. Button

    Enables/disables the motion picture button.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 6 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 6

    Auto Review

    Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

    Constant Preview

    You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

    Level gauge

    Enable the level gauge functionality.

    Photo grid line

    Enables a grid as a composition guide for your photography.

    Framing outline

    Sets a frame for videography.

    Center marker

    The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

    AF Area Display

    Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 7 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 7

    Live View Boost

    Boosts the performance of the Live View Display.

    Monochrome Live View

    You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.

    Night Mode

    This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.

    LVF/Monitor Disp. Set

    You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.

    Expo.Meter

    Display the exposure meter.

    • Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
    • Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
    • When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
    • If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
    Focal Length

    select whether or not to display focal length information.

    Photo/video Preview

    Selects the functionality of the Photo/Video Preview.

    Photos/Videos remaining

    Show how many photos or how many minutes of video remain on your SD card.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 8 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 3)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 8

    Show/Hide monitor layout

    Show the monitor layout or not.

    Blinking Highlights

    When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

    Zebra Pattern

    Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

    HLG view assist.

    Assist with the exposure of HLG images.

    Sheer Overlay

    Allows you to display a previously taken image with opacity so that you can line-up another shot.

    I.S. status scope

    You can activate a type of scope with a level meter and a green indicator that shows you how stable you are. This can be useful even on a tripod to see how stable your rig is for long exposures.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 9 of 9 (lens and other settings)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 9

    Lens Focus resume

    Resume the focus point of the lens when the Panasonic S1H is switched off or recording is resumed.

    Focus Ring Control

    Determines the speed of the focus ring between linear and non-linear. You can basically setup the focus ring in any way you wish according to your video style.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 1 of 6 (Card/File settings)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 1

    Card Format

    Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

    Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

    Double Slot Function

    Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.

    • Relay Rec: Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card runs out of free space during recording. Records same images to the two cards.
    • Backup Rec: Records same images to the two cards.
    • Allocation Rec: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for different image formats like Jpeg on one and RAW on the other.
    Folder/File Settings

    Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

    File Number Reset

    Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

    Copyright Information

    Add copyright information to the EXIF data of each photo. This can include copyright as well as photographer information.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 2 of 6 (Monitor/Display settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 2

    Power Save Mode

    These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.

    • Sleep Mode: The Panasonic S1H is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
    • Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes.
    • Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the Panasonic S1H has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
    • Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
    Monitor Frame Rate

    This sets the monitor frame rate to either 120fps or 60fps. 120fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.

    LVF Frame Rate

    This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 60 or 120fps. Again, at 120 fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

    Monitor Settings

    Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

    Monitor Backlight

    These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

    Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the Lumix S1.

    • Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.
    • Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
    • Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.
    Remaining Battery Level

    This setting enables  either a percentage display or a battery with bar display to show remaining power in your battery.

    Status LCD

    You can set the LCD Backlight to High, Low or Off.

    Eye Sensor

    Sensitivity will This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

    LVF/Monitor Switch will This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 3 of 6 (Monitor/Display settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 3

    Level Gauge Assist

    Adjust: Hold the Panasonic S1H in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

    Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 4 of 6 (input and output settings)

    MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 6

    Beep

    This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

    Headphone volume

    If you’re using a headphone, you can adjust the volume here.

    Wi-Fi

    It’s possible to control your Panasonic S1H with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

    To use the Wi-Fi function on the Panasonic S1, a wireless access point is needed off course.

    By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the Lumix is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

    When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

    Wi-Fi Setup

    Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the S1H or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

    Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

    LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

    PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

    Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

    Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

    Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

    Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

    Bluetooth

    You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.

    USB

    Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.

    • Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
    • PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
    • PC Tether: Select this setting to control the Panasonic S1H from a PC installed with supported software.
    • Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
    Battery information

    This menu item will tell you how much juice and lifespan is left in your battery is.

    Battery Use Priority

    Sets which battery should be used first, either grip or camera.

    TV Connection

    Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 5 of 6 (General settings)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 5

    Save to Custom mode

    Save a range of settings to a custom mode.

    Load Custom Mode

    load one of the custom modes previously saved.

    Custom Mode Settings

    A full overview of the Panasonic S1H custom operations modes.

    Save/Restore Camera Setting

    Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to thePanasonic S1, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

    Reset

    The following settings are reset to the default:

    • Recording settings.
    • Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
    • Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
    • Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 6 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 6

    Clock Set

    You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic S1, but you can also change this here.

    Time Zone

    Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

    Pixel Refresh

    This setting will perform optimisation of the imaging device (sensor) as well as the processor. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

    Sensor Cleaning

    Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.

    Language

    Set the language displayed on the screen.

    Firmware Version

    This enables the firmware versions of the S1H and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

    Online Manual

    Provides a link to the online manual of the Panasonic Lumix S1.

    Approved Regulations

    It’s mandatory for any electronics company to supply a list of approved regulations which is adheres too. These might be different per region.

    MENU – My Menu (that little man)

    Panasonic S1, my menu

    My Menu Setting

    You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.

    • Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
    • Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
    • Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
    • Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.

    Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

    The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

    The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style thePanasonic S1H is in.

    Panasonic S1, Q menu

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.

    Motion Pic. Set

    You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

    Picture Setting

    You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 3:2: native sensor ratio
    • 4:3: the ratio used in the Panasonic micro-four-thirds cameras.
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
    • 65:42: super wide crop for a panorama effect
    • 2:1

    Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

    Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Panasonic S1H which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    AFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.

    AF Mode

    This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

    Face/Eye Detection

    A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

    When the Panasonic S1H detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.

    • Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.
    • White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.

    When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

    The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

    Tracking

    The Panasonic S1H keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

    • Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
    • Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.

    If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

    The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

    225 Area

    Widest setting with all AF points used.  Up to 225 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

    Custom Multi

    From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

    1-Area

    The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

    Pinpoint

    You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

    Burst Shot Setting

    You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

    Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the Panasonic S1. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    • Highlight weighted: priority is given to highlights in faces.

    Exposure Comp

    If you feel like your LumixS1H is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

    ISO sensitivity

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

     Panasonic Lumix S1H Conclusion

    I hope you find my run-through of the Panasonic S1H Menu with pointers, tips and tricks along the way helpful in your quest to master this interesting mirrorless camera. If you have any more questions, please feel free to comment below and I will do my best to help you out.